2018 Nissan Titan and Titan XD

2018
TITAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
FOREWORD
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have
any questions, they will be glad to assist
you with the extensive resources available
to them.
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which you vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!
SAFETY
INFORMATION
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat (if so equipped).
∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive
mark is placed at the bemodels, a
ginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. For additional
information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center
of gravity for off-road use. As with
other vehicles with features of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and
rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For
more
information
go
to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon and
Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription after trial
period and are
sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in
the 48 contiguous
USA and DC.
SiriusXM® satellite
service is also
available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Do-it-yourself
8
Maintenance and schedules
9
Technical and consumer information
10
Index
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-11
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Rear seat belts (Crew and King
Cab® models only) (if so equipped)
(P. 1-15)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)
Front seat belts with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-15, 1-53)
Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53)
Occupant classification sensors
(weight sensors) (if so equipped)
(P. 1-53)
Front seats (P. 1-2)
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)
Rear seats (Crew and King Cab®
models only) (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (Crew and
King Cab® models only)
(if so equipped) (P. 1-26)
Top tether strap anchor (Crew and
King Cab® models only)
(if so equipped) (P. 1-26)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, Single and King
Cab® models similar.
LII2479
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Power windows (P. 2-87)
Windshield (P. 8-20)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-51)
Engine hood (P. 3-25)
Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
Front fog lights (if so equipped)
(P. 2-59)
Daytime Running Light (DRL)
system (if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Headlight and turn signal switches
(P. 2-54, 2-58)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Daytime Running Light (DRL)
system (P. 2-54)
Tire pressure (P. 8-34)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-34)
Mirrors (P. 3-32)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-17)
Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, Single and King
Cab® models similar.
LIC3769
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Antenna (P. 4-88)
Cargo lamp (P. 2-60)
Rear sliding window (P. 2-87)
Bed liner storage bins
(if so equipped) (P. 2-75)
Under rail bed lamps
(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)
Truck box (P. 3-37)
Tailgate (P. 3-37)
Rearview camera (P. 4-10)
Towing (P. 10-36)
Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-64)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Fuel-filler cap* (P. 3-25)
Fuel-filler door* (P. 3-25)
Fuel recommendation* (P. 10-2)
Child safety rear door lock (Crew
Cab models only) (P. 3-5)
*: For diesel models, refer to the separate
Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, Single and King
Cab® models similar.
LII2416
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Interior lights (if so equipped)
(P. 2-91)
Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-91)
Console light (if so equipped)
(P. 2-91)
Sun visors (P. 3-30)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-32)
Glove box (P. 2-75)
Console box (if so equipped)
(P. 2-75)
Cup holders (P. 2-75)
Spare tire tools location (Crew and
King Cab® models only) (P. 6-3)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, Single and King
Cab® models similar.
LII2480
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2352
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Vents (P. 4-34)
Turn signal switch (P. 2-58)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-51)
Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-87)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-87, 4-133)
Vehicle information display
controls (P. 2-33)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
Horn (P. 2-59)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-21)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-41)
Shift lever (P. 5-16)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-70)
Audio controls (P. 4-48)
Center display (P. 4-4)
Climate controls (P. 4-34)
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-53)
Glove box (P. 2-75)
Front passenger air bag status
light (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)
Power outlet (P. 2-71)
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)
Power outlet (P. 2-71)
Auxiliary jack (P. 4-48)
USB port (P. 4-48)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-71)
Climate control seat switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)
Heated front seat switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-65)
Front and rear sonar system OFF
switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-64)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-45)
Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-11)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-29)
25.
26.
Headlight aiming control
(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)
Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-60)
Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-67)
Hill descent control system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-66)
Headlight switch (P. 2-54)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-59)
Instrument brightness control
switches (P. 2-54)
Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parenthesis for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Cummins 5.0 L engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
Fuse box (P. 8-22)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Engine coolant reservoir*
Fuel filter (Stage 2)*
Engine oil filler cap*
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
Air cleaner*
Battery (P. 8-15)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
Radiator cap*
Engine oil dipstick*
Drive belt location*
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Battery (P. 8-15)
*: Refer to the separate Titan Diesel Owner’s
Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI2870
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
VK56VD engine (non-XD model)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
Fuse box (P. 8-22)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Drive belt location (P. 8-17)
Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
Battery (P. 8-15)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI3056
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
VK56VD engine (XD model)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
Fuse box (P. 8-22)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
Drive belt location (P. 8-17)
Battery (P. 8-15)
Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI2973
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
or
Name
Page
4–Wheel Drive
(4WD) warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-22
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-23
Warning
light
Name
Brake warning
light
Page
2-24
or
Charge warning
light
2-25
2-25
Automatic Transmission check
warning light
2-23
Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF) warning light (if so
equipped)
2-23
Door open warning light
2-25
Automatic Transmission oil temperature warning
light
2-25
Automatic Transmission park
warning light
(
model)
2-23
Driver seat belt
warning and
chime
Engine oil pressure warning light
2-25
Warning
light
Name
Page
Low DEF warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-25
Low fuel warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-25
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-26
Low windshield
washer fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-27
Malfunction
warning light (red)
(if so equipped)
2-27
Master warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-28
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
Warning
light
Name
Page
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-28
P position selecting warning light
(if so equipped)
2-28
Passenger seat
belt warning light
(if so equipped)
2-28
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-29
Water in Fuel
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-29
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Electronic locking
rear differential
(E-Lock) system
ON indicator light
(if so equipped)
2-29
Engine start operation indicator
(if so equipped)
2-30
Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-30
Front passenger
air bag status
light (if so
equipped)
2-30
High beam indicator light (blue)
2-30
Hill descent control system ON
indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-30
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
(yellow)
2-30
Security indicator
light
2-31
Side light and
headlight indicator light (green) (if
so equipped)
2-31
Slip indicator light
2-31
TOW mode ON
indicator light
2-31
Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights
2-31
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-32
MEMO
Illustrated table of contents 0-13
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual bench seat adjustment
(Single Cab models and if so equipped
for King Cab® and Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front manual captain’s chair seat
adjustment (if so equipped for
passenger seat for King Cab® and Crew
Cab models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Front power captain’s chair seat
adjustment (if so equipped for Crew
Cab and King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Front armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Rear armrests (Crew Cab models and if
so equipped for King Cab® models). . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Head restraints/Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Removable (without Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System only) . . . . . . . .1-13
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (Crew Cab models
and King Cab® models with rear bench
seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Top tether anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH (Crew Cab models and
King Cab® models with rear bench
seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts (Crew Cab models
and King Cab® models with rear bench
seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts (Single Cab models
and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete
models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH (Crew Cab
models and King Cab® models with
rear bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts — rear
bench seat (Crew Cab models and King
Cab® models with rear bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts —
passenger seat and center seat (Single
Cab models and King Cab® Rear Seat
Delete models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Precautions on SRS (with NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Precautions on SRS (without NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . 1-78
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-80
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-81
SEATS
∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
ARS1152
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (Single Cab models
and if so equipped for King Cab®
and Crew Cab models)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
LRS2559
LRS2560
Forward and backward
Reclining
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIR
SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped
for passenger seat for King Cab®
and Crew Cab models)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
LRS2758
Front center bench seat
adjustment
The front center bench seat folds down by
pulling on the strap. It does not have adjustments in between the upright and the
folded down positions. It is either in seating
position or armrest position.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2559
Forward and backward
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.
LRS2560
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
LRS2743
FRONT POWER CAPTAIN’S CHAIR
SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped
for Crew Cab and King Cab®
models)
Operating tips
∙ The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during operation, wait
30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).
LRS2744
LRS2745
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle and height of the seat cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats (if so
equipped) when they are in the folddown position. In a collision, people
riding in these areas without proper
restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
LRS0425
FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)
To use the center armrest on the front
bench seat, pull on the strap in between
the front passenger and center seats and
fold it down to the resting position.
LRS2748
REAR ARMRESTS (Crew Cab
models and if so equipped for
King Cab® models)
To use the center armrest on the bench
seats, pull on the tab in the center of the
seat and fold it down as shown.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
the occupants are in the rear seat area
or any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or
feet to get caught or pinched in the
seat.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
∙ Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace
and adjust them properly if they have
been removed for any reason.
∙ If the head restraints/headrests are
removed for any reason, they should
be securely stored to prevent them
from causing injury to passengers or
damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
LRS2766
Folding the rear bench seat up
(Crew Cab models and King Cab®
models with rear bench seat)
To fold the rear bench seat up for storage
capacity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking tools from the storage
area:
1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2767
2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion
toward the back of the vehicle until it
locks in place.
WARNING
∙ When the vehicle is being used to
carry cargo, properly secure all cargo
to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
LRS2768
3. Repeat this process to raise and secure
the seat cushion on the other side of
the vehicle for maximum storage capacity.
To return the rear bench seat to a seating
position, pull the latch on the bottom of the
seat cushions to release the seat from the
locked position. Make sure to properly
push the seat cushion down into place.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Never ride
in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0920
Folding the rear bench seat down
(Crew Cab models and King Cab®
models with rear bench seat)
The rear bench seat can be tilted forward
to access the child restraint anchor point
locations.
To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap
1 and tilt the seatback. The child reup 䊊
2 can be accessed
straint anchor points 䊊
behind the rear bench seatback.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or
death in an accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest
stalks
or
remove
the
head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2020
Front bucket seat
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
LRS2633
Front bench seat
LRS2818
Front bench seat only
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.
is
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
LRS2302
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
2. Multiple notches
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
3. Lock knob
2. Single notch
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
4. Stalks
3. Lock knob
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
4. Stalks
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
LRS2302
REMOVABLE (without Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System
only)
CAUTION
Do not remove head restraint/headrest
from vehicles equipped with Dual Head
Restraint/Headrest DVD System. Removal may damage the system wiring.
LRS2303
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
1 must be
with the notch (notches) 䊊
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
䊊
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
LRS2351
For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2305
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
SEAT BELTS
LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
SSS0134
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats (if so equipped) and in an
appropriate restraint.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0016
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
SSS0014
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will illuminate for a period of time. If
the seat is occupied and seat belt is
latched within that period of time, the
light will go out.
For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
PREGNANT WOMEN
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats (if so equipped) and in an
appropriate restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
LRS2559
Manual front seat shown (Single Cab
models and if so equipped for King Cab®
and Crew Cab models)
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
LRS2743
Front power captain’s chair seat shown
(if so equipped for King Cab® and Crew Cab models)
LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat, front center seat
(if so equipped), and the rear seating positions’ (if so equipped) three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)”
in this section.
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
1
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so the belt passes over
desired position 䊊
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
WARNING
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat (if so equipped). Studies show that
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front
seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in serious
injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
WRS0256
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat (if so equipped). Studies show
that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat (if so
equipped) than in the front seat. If
you must install a forward-facing
child restraint in the front seat, refer to “Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat
belts — passenger seat and center
seat (Single Cab models and King
Cab® Rear Seat Delete models)” in
this section.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System (if so equipped), never
install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. An inflating air
bag could seriously injure or kill a
child. A rear-facing child restraint
must only be used in the rear seat
(if so equipped).
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
Vehicles equipped with rear seats are
equipped with a universal child restraint
anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system. Some child restraints include rigid
or webbing-mounted attachments that
can be connected to these anchors. For
additional information, refer to “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
system (Crew Cab models and King Cab®
models with rear bench seat)” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
LRS2859
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
(Crew Cab models and King Cab®
models with rear bench seat)
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
LRS0748
LATCH lower anchor location
LRS2869
LATCH lower anchor point locations
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
LRS0393
Crew Cab models and King Cab® models
with rear bench seat
TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINT
LOCATIONS
LRS2819
Single Cab models
∙ On the back of the passenger and center seats (King Cab® Rear Seat Delete
models) as shown.
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
∙ Under the rear window behind the
bench seat (Single Cab models) or behind the rear bench seat (Crew Cab
models and King Cab® models with rear
bench seat) as shown.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew
Cab models and King Cab®
models with rear bench seat)
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
LRS2879
King Cab® Rear Seat Delete models
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear bench seats using
the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0801
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
WRS0802
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 2 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS (Crew Cab models and King
Cab® models with rear bench
seat)
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS (Single Cab models and
King Cab® Rear Seat Delete
models)
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental air bag could seriously
injure or kill your child.
∙ Never let an infant who requires the
use of a rear-facing child restraint ride
in this vehicle.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH (Crew Cab models and
King Cab® models with rear
bench seat)
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the rear bench
seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
LRS2398
Forward-facing
webbing-mounted –
step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
LRS2399
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
2. Position the top tether strap over the
seatback.
LRS2769
Rear bench seat
A
䊊
Anchor points
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear bench outboarding seating positions only).
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — REAR BENCH
SEAT (Crew Cab models and King
Cab® models with rear bench
seat)
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
LRS2769
䊊
A
Anchor points
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — PASSENGER
SEAT AND CENTER SEAT (Single
Cab models and King Cab® Rear
Seat Delete models)
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt:
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
WRS0475
Forward-facing — step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
(if
passenger air bag status light
so equipped) may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being
used. For additional information, refer
to “Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2769
Single Cab models
A
䊊
Anchor points
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
LRS2880
King Cab® Rear Seat Delete models
A
䊊
B
䊊
Top tether straps
Anchor points
Bench seat
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
PASSENGER SEATING POSITION
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap over the
seatback.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.
LRS2479
A.
Low back booster seat
B.
High back booster seat
LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat (if so equipped) or in the
front passenger seat:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
LRS0464
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats (if
so equipped) or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
LRS0454
WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head
restraints/headrests" in this section.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (with
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
(if so equipped)
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag
WRS0475
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pas(if so
senger air bag status light
equipped) may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and
the type of booster seat being used. For
additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in
this section.
side-impact
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and right front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and right
front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bag is designed to inflate
on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions (if so
equipped) in certain side impact or rollover
collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,
curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the seat belts
and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental
air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity
of injury in an accident.
WRS0031
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.
∙ The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates
the air bags as needed. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
ARS1133
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
ARS1041
ARS1042
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat (if so
equipped), if possible.
WARNING
WARNING
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1043
ARS1044
ARS1045
WRS0256
WARNING
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child
restraint must only be used in the rear
seat (if so equipped).
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
WRS0431
LRS0396
SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows.
Do not lean against doors or windows.
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats (if
so equipped) to extend their hand out
of the window or lean against the
door. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
LRS0421
SSS0159
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat (if so
equipped), do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air
bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly
restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
7. Occupant classification system control
unit
8. Seat belt buckle switches
9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
10. Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
11. Satellite sensors
LRS2823
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
bench seats (if so equipped) to push
or pull on the seatback pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
1 kg (2.2 lbs.) on the seatback, head
restraint or in the seatback pocket.
∙ Do not store luggage behind the seat
that can press into the seatback.
∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear bench
seats (if so equipped). If the front seat
does contact the rear bench seats (if
so equipped), the air bag system may
determine a sensor malfunction has
occurred and the front passenger air
bag status light may illuminate and
the supplemental air bag warning
light may flash.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat as
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you take your
vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in
the rear seating positions (if so
equipped). Do not use the front seat or
transport a child in the vehicle (Single
Cab and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete
models only).
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU).
Inflator operation is based on the severity
of a collision and seat belt usage for the
driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based upon the information from
the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash
severity. Additionally, the front passenger
air bag may be automatically turned off
under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the front passenger
seat and how the seat belt is used. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, the front
passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light
will not be illuminated, but the air bag will
be off). For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status light” in
this section. One front air bag inflating does
not indicate improper performance of the
system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If you
are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WRS0475
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
which is located on
bag status light
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
light is OFF and the front pasThe
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
light
outlined in this section: The
may or may not illuminate, depending
on the size of the occupant or the type
of child restraint being used. When
light is illuminated, the front
the
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
inflate in a crash. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag” in this section.
∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
passenger meets the conditions as
light is
outlined in this section: The
OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF under some conditions. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child up to
the approximate size and weight of a one
year old is properly restrained in the front
passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System is designed to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF. For a properly restrained child who is larger than the approximate size and weight of a one year
old, the front passenger air bag may or
may not be automatically turned OFF, de-
pending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. After installing the child restraint and positioning
the child, place the ignition switch in the ON
position: if the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated, the air bag is OFF. If
the front passenger air bag status light is
not illuminated, the air bag will inflate in a
crash.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat (if so equipped). NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints
and booster seats be properly installed in a
rear seat (if so equipped). If this is not pos-
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
sible, the occupant classification sensor is
designed to operate as described above to
turn the front passenger air bag OFF for
specified child restraints as required by the
regulations. Failing to properly secure child
restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash
instead of being OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF
with the seat occupied. The light will not
illuminate when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. Always
make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly.
If necessary, a NISSAN dealer can check
system operation by using a special tool.
Until you have confirmed with a dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition
the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat (if so equipped). Do not use the front
seat or transport a child in the vehicle
(Single Cab and King Cab® Rear Seat Delete
models only).
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the
front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the
front passenger air bag status light will go
from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then
to OFF. This is normal system operation
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system locks the classification
during driving so it is important that you
confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the
occupant classification sensor system
may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop
(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front
passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined
above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ An object weighing over 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
NOTE:
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (without
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
(if so equipped)
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag
side-impact
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head and chest of the driver
and right front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
right front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bag is designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side impact or rollover collisions. In a side
impact, the curtain air bags are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for
a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the seat belts
and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental
air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater
risk of injury or death in a crash. You
may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit
back against the seatback and as far
away as practical from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Always
properly use the seat belts.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.
∙ The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates
the air bags as needed. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1042
ARS1043
ARS1044
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71
ARS1045
WRS0431
WRS0256
WARNING
∙ Even with the air bag system, never
install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat. An inflating air bag
could seriously injure or kill a child. A
rear-facing child restraint must only
be used in the rear seat.
1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
WARNING
LRS0396
SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows.
Do not lean against doors or windows.
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions
are
shown
in
the
previous
illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73
LRS0421
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions
are
shown
in
the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0159
Supplemental air bag system
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Seat belt buckle switches
7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
8. Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
9. Satellite sensors
LRS2771
This vehicle is equipped with supplemental
front air bag system for the driver and right
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The
supplemental front air bags are designed
to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag
system operation.
The supplemental air bag system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU) and seat
belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat
belts are fastened. Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and
whether the seat belts are being used. Only
one front air bag may inflate in a crash,
depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. This does not indicate improper
performance of the system. If you have any
questions about the performance of your
air bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the beginning of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the driver and right
front passenger. They can help save lives
and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
1-76 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
front occupants. Because of this, the force
of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental
air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bag inflates.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ If your vehicle has front recovery
hooks as original factory equipment
do not remove or modify them. If it
was not equipped with front recovery
hooks do not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system resulting in
injury or death.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harness* should
not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the air bag system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77
are similar to those of a higher severity
impact. They are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted. They
may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
LRS2094
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDEIMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN
SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
1-78 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and front passenger seated
upright as far as practical away from the
side air bag. Rear seat passengers should
be seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag
and curtain air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.
∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It
is also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
is used to indicate malfunctions
light
in the pretensioner system. For additional
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning
light indicates there is a malfunction, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
1-80 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0885
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81
Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
1-82 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (if so
equipped) should be checked to verify
it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. The OCS
(weight sensor) (if so equipped)
should be checked even if no air bags
deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS (weight sensor) (if so equipped) function may result in an improper air bag
deployment resulting in injury or
death.
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Off-road monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Vehicle information display (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-32
How to use the vehicle information
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Diesel warnings and indicators
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Rain-sensing auto wiper system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Climate controlled seat switches
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-62
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-64
Warning systems switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-64
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-65
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-66
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Front and rear sonar system OFF switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
12v Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Rear-door pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Console side pockets (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-76
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Under-seat storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Console box storage trays
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-80
Under front seat storage bin
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Overhead sunglasses storage
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Grocery hooks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-85
Cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
C-Channel cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-86
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Rear power window switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Personal Lights (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-96
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2352
2-4 Instruments and controls
Vents (P. 4-34)
Turn signal switch (P. 2-58)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-51)
Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-87)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-87, 4-133)
Vehicle information display
controls (P. 2-33)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
Horn (P. 2-59)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-21)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-41)
Shift lever (P. 5-16)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-70)
Audio controls (P. 4-48)
Center display (P. 4-4)
Climate controls (P. 4-34)
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-53)
Glove box (P. 2-75)
Front passenger air bag status
light (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)
Power outlet (P. 2-71)
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)
Warning Systems switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)
Power outlet (P. 2-71)
Auxiliary jack (P. 4-48)
USB port (P. 4-48)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-71)
Climate control seat switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-60)
Heated front seat switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-65)
Front and rear sonar system OFF
switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-64)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-45)
Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-11)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-29)
25.
26.
Headlight aiming control
(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Power inverter switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-68)
Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-60)
Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-67)
Hill descent control system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-66)
Headlight switch (P. 2-54)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-59)
Instrument brightness control
switches (P. 2-54)
Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parenthesis for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-5
METERS AND GAUGES
LIC3100
Type A (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Odometer
Outside temperature display
2-6 Instruments and controls
4.
5.
6.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located in the vehicle
information display (Type A) (if so equipped)
or the trip computer (Type B) (if so
equipped) to the left of the speedometer
and can be accessed with the vehicle in the
ON position.
LIC3497
Type B (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
5.
6.
Trip computer
Odometer
Outside temperature display
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Instruments and controls 2-7
LIC3727
LIC2255
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
Type A (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
1 are displayed in the vehicle information
䊊
display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip
computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
2-8 Instruments and controls
LIC3728
Type B (if so equipped)
Changing the display
2 on the left
Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:
ODO → Trip
→ Trip
→ ODO
Resetting the trip odometer
2 for about
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊
2 seconds resets the currently displayed
trip odometer to zero.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.
LIC3543
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
1 .
engine into the red zone 䊊
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating
the engine in the red zone may cause
serious engine damage.
LIC2220
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera1 when
ture is within the normal range 䊊
the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
indicates that the fuel-filler
The
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. If
the vehicle has run out of fuel, the system will need to be primed. Turn the
key switch to ON for 20–30 seconds
and then back OFF. Repeat 3–4 times
or until the fuel pressure builds. Once
primed, start the vehicle. After a few
light should
driving trips. the
turn off. If the light remains on after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
LIC2222
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
2-10 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate
low automatic transmission fluid
level. Use the dipstick to check the
fluid level. For additional information,
refer to “6- speed automatic transmission fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
LIC3390
AUXILIARY GAUGES (if so
equipped)
1. Exhaust temperature gauge (if so
equipped)
2. Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge
3. Turbo meter (if so equipped)
4. Engine oil pressure gauge
5. Engine oil temperature gauge
Exhaust temperature gauge (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the temperature of
the automatic transmission fluid.
∙ If the gauge indicates automatic
transmission fluid temperature over
the normal range, stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible. It is recommended that you have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the transmission.
Turbo meter (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Engine oil pressure gauge
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication
system oil pressure while the engine is running. The bar should be in the middle of the
gauge when the engine is running.
6. Voltmeter
Instruments and controls 2-11
CAUTION
∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop
below the normal range. If the range is not
within the normal range (11 – 15 volts) while
the engine is running, it may indicate that
the charging system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ If the gauge needle does not move
with the proper amount of engine oil,
it is recommended that you have the
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Continued vehicle operation in such a
condition could cause serious damage to the engine.
Engine oil temperature gauge
This gauge measures the temperature of
the engine oil.
Voltmeter
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it
indicates the generator voltage.
2-12 Instruments and controls
LIC3479
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
LEVEL (if so equipped)
This gauge measures the DEF level remaining in the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel and refueling” in the
“Titan Diesel Owner’s Supplement”.
The Roll Gauge (right) indicates the angle of
the vehicle position left and right. The value
will be displayed below the gauge while the
vehicle graphic will rotate to indicate condition of the vehicle leaning to the left or
right.
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the modes of the trip computer
can be selected by pressing the
buttons on the steering wheel. The following modes can be selected:
LIC3417
∙ Range
LIC3504
OFF-ROAD MONITOR (if so
equipped)
∙ Average fuel economy
Range
∙ Average speed
The off-road monitor displays the various
slopes of the vehicle.
∙ Time
The range mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of
fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel
economy which will depend on driving
conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that fuel remaining volume cannot be read by the fuel
pump and should be refilled as soon as
possible.
The Pitch Gauge (left) indicates the angle of
the vehicle position up or down. The value
will be displayed below the gauge while the
vehicle graphic will rotate to indicate condition pointed up or down.
The Tire Angle (center) indicates the angle
of the tires based on turning of the steering
wheel. The graphic image will show the actual vehicle tire position while the angle is
to be displayed below as reference.
∙ Tire info
∙ Settings
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-13
NOTE:
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
LIC3505
2-14 Instruments and controls
LIC3506
Average fuel economy
Average speed
The average fuel economy mode shows
the average fuel economy since the last
reset. Resetting is done by pressing the ENTER button on the steering wheel for more
than approximately 1 second. The display is
updated every 30 seconds. At about the
first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----).
The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the ENTER button
on the steering wheel for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----).
LIC3507
LIC3508
LIC3509
Time
Tire info
Settings
The time mode shows the time the vehicle
has been on since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the
ENTER button on the steering wheel for
more than approximately 1 second.
The tire info mode shows the pressure of
each tire. To see the individual tire pressures, press the ENTER button when the
desired tire is shown. The tire pressures are
displayed as follows:
The settings mode allows the user to
change the trip computer display units and
set maintenance reminders. To select the
desired menu item, press the ENTER button when it is shown. The menu items are
displayed as follows:
∙ FL (Front Left)
∙ FR (Front Right)
∙ Engine Oil
∙ RL (Rear Left)
∙ Oil Filter
∙ RR (Rear Right)
∙ Rotation
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
∙ Other
∙ Units
Instruments and controls 2-15
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
Engine oil
The engine oil menu item allows the user
to set a maintenance reminder at a specific interval. To set the reminder, press the
ENTER button when “ENGINE OIL” is shown.
buttons, set the desired
Using the
interval to receive a maintenance reminder.
To reset the mileage, press and hold the
ENTER button for approximately 1 second.
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
For additional information, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
Rotation
The rotation menu item allows the user to
set a maintenance reminder at a specific
interval. To set the reminder, press the ENTER button when “ROTATION” is shown. Usbuttons, set the desired ining the
terval to receive a maintenance reminder.
To reset the mileage, press and hold the
ENTER button for approximately 1 second.
For additional information, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
Oil filter
For additional information, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
The oil filter menu item allows the user to
set a maintenance reminder at a specific
interval. To set the reminder, press the ENTER button when “OIL FILTER” is shown. Usbuttons, set the desired ining the
terval to receive a maintenance reminder.
To reset the mileage, press and hold the
ENTER button for approximately 1 second.
2-16 Instruments and controls
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.
Other
The other menu item allows the user to set
a maintenance reminder at a specific interval to check various other maintenance
items (ie. air filter, brakes, coolant). To set
the reminder, press the ENTER button
when “OTHER” is shown. Using the
buttons, set the desired interval to receive
a maintenance reminder.
To reset the mileage, press and hold the
ENTER button for approximately 1 second.
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
For additional information, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
Units
The units menu item allows the user to
change the trip computer units to US or
METRIC. To select the units, press the ENTER button when desired unit is shown.
To return to the main menu selections,
scroll to “EXIT” and press ENTER.
LIC3544
LIC3545
4WD error
4WD tires
The “4WD ERROR” message appears in the
center of the trip computer when there is a
malfunction with the 4–wheel drive system. For additional information, refer to
“4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light” in this
section.
The “4WD TIRES” message appears in the
center of the trip computer when there is a
large difference in wheel rotation. If this
messages appears, switch the vehicle into
2WD mode. For additional information, refer to “Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Instruments and controls 2-17
COMPASS (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism
and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
With the ignition switch placed in the ON
button as deposition, press the
scribed in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror.
You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route.
The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.
Press and hold
the
button for
about:
1 second
5 seconds
9 seconds
Feature:
(Press button again for about
1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
to correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration
mode
For information about the automatic antiglare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
2-18 Instruments and controls
LIC1487
button for about 1 second
Press the
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
1
position to toggle the compass display 䊊
on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
button for
1. Press and hold the
button
about 11 seconds or the
for about 8 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration.
or the
button re3. Press the
peatedly to toggle through the zone
numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will
show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
WIC0355
Instruments and controls 2-19
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and
for about 10 seconds.
hold the
The “C” icon in the compass display will
illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in three complete circles at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
2-20 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the
operation of the compass.
∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
4–Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (if so
equipped)
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light
(if so equipped)
or
Low tire pressure warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
(if so equipped)
Automatic Transmission check warning
light
Low windshield washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue)
Automatic Transmission oil temperature
warning light
Malfunction warning light (red) (if so
equipped)
Hill descent control system ON indicator
light (if so equipped)
Automatic Transmission park warning
model)
light (
Master warning light (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (yellow)
or
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light
(if so equipped)
Security indicator light
Charge warning light
P position selecting warning light
(if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green) (if so equipped)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning
light (if so equipped)
Passenger seat belt warning light
(if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Door open warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
TOW mode ON indicator light
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
Brake warning light
Instruments and controls 2-21
Driver seat belt warning light and chime
Water in Fuel warning light
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Engine oil pressure warning light
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
Low DEF warning light (if so equipped)
Engine start operation indicator light
(if so equipped)
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
,
,
,
or
The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
, ATP ,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
2-22 Instruments and controls
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display
between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.
WARNING LIGHTS
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning
properly, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. For additional information, refer to “Using 4–Wheel Drive
(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
CAUTION
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks
during operation, have your vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
4–Wheel Drive (4WD)
warning light (if so
equipped)
∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
warning light turns on when you are
driving on dry hard surface roads:
The 4WD warning light comes on when the
key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon
after the engine is started.
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position with the brake
pedal depressed, and shift the
4WD shift switch to 2WD.
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service as
soon as possible.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for about
2 seconds. If the light comes on at any
other time, it may indicate the automatic
transmission system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
Automatic Transmission
check warning light
Automatic Transmission oil
temperature warning light
This light comes on when the automatic
transmission oil temperature is too high. If
the light comes on while driving, reduce the
vehicle speed as soon as safely possible
until the light turns off.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation when the
A/T oil temperature warning light is on
may
damage
the
automatic
transmission.
Automatic Transmission
park warning light (
model)
WARNING
∙ If the 4WD mode indicator is off or the
ATP warning light is on, this indicates
that the automatic transmission P
(Park) position will not function and
could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, causing serious personal
injury or property damage. Always set
the parking brake. For additional information, refer to “Using 4–wheel
drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
∙ If the ATP light is on, this indicates that
the automatic transmission P (Park)
position will not function and the
transfer case is in neutral.
∙ When parking, always make sure that
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set.
Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in
the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or
property damage.
Instruments and controls 2-23
∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H
or 4LO position again to turn off the
ATP warning light when the shift lever
is in the P position and the ATP warning light is on. (Before shifting the
4WD switch into the 4LO position,
move the shift lever to the N position
once, shift the shift lever into P again
and make sure the ATP warning light
is off.)
This light indicates that the automatic
transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured
in any drive position while the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position, the transmission will
disengage and the drive wheels will not
lock.
or
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because
driving
it
could
be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort and pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system (if so equipped) and
the vehicle battery may not charge
completely. For additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) warning light (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Driver seat belt warning
light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belt. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position and remains illuminated until the
driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same
time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately, and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Low DEF warning light (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Low fuel warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-25
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that
monitors the tire pressure of all tires except
the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning also appears in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
2-26 Instruments and controls
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
For vehicles with a vehicle information display, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.
Low windshield-washer
fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
Malfunction warning light
(red) (if so equipped)
If this warning light illuminates this indicates either the coolant temperature is
above a critical threshold or the exhaust
temperatures are above a critical threshold. When illuminated this lamp indicates
the need to stop the engine as soon as it
can be safely done. The engine must remain shut down until the engine can be
repaired. For additional information, refer
to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Instruments and controls 2-27
CAUTION
∙ Continuing vehicle operation without
proper servicing of the engine control
system could lead to poor driveability,
reduced fuel economy, and damage
to the engine control system, which
may affect the vehicle’s warranty
coverage.
∙ Failure to drain the water from the
fuel filter can cause serious damage
to the engine. It is recommended that
you contact a NISSAN dealer as soon
as possible.
Master warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when various vehicle
information display warnings appear.
∙ No key warning
∙ Low fuel warning
∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap warning
∙ Check tire pressure warning
2-28 Instruments and controls
∙ 4WD error (if so equipped)
∙ Front & rear tire size differences (if so
equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
warning light (if so
equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on for about
2 seconds and then turns off. This light illuminates or blinks as follows:
∙ The light blinks in yellow when the door is
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
∙ The light blinks in green when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of
power. Replace the battery with a new
one. For additional information, refer to
“Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.
∙ The light illuminates in yellow when it
warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.
If the warning light illuminates in yellow
while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine. If the light
comes on while the engine is running, you
can drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
P position selecting
warning light (if so
equipped)
The light blinks red and the warning buzzer
sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with
the Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but
the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.
When the warning light blinks, place the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position, then place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position.
Passenger seat belt
warning light (if so
equipped)
The light reminds you to notify the passenger to fasten their seat belt. The light illuminates whenever the ignition is placed in the
ON or START position and remains illuminated until the passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
The light will remain on for a period of time
when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)
and the passenger seat belt is unfastened.
If the passenger seat belt is fastened, the
light will turn off.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety-Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual for precautions on seat belt
usage.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Water in Fuel warning light
(if so equipped)
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Electronic locking rear
differential (E-Lock) system
ON indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
clutch is fully engaged.
The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on. When the system fully
engages, the light remains on. If the switch
is on and the indicator light continues to
flash, the system is not engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” in this section and “Electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Engine start operation
indicator light (if so
equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Automatic transmission models: This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the push-button ignition switch
with the brake pedal depressed.
Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light (if so equipped)
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
2-30 Instruments and controls
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.
Hill descent control system
ON indicator light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on briefly and
then turns off.
The light comes on when the hill descent
control system is activated.
If the hill descent control switch is on and
the indicator light blinks, the system may
be disabled.
You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
If the indicator light does not come on
when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to “Hill descent control system ON indicator light” in
this section and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) (yellow)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped) or the trip computer (if so
equipped). If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the
light does not turn off
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed
to the dealer.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Security indicator light
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:
This light blinks whenever the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational.
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional information, refer to “Headlight switch” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing
its traction limits. The road surface may be
slippery.
TOW mode ON indicator
light
This light comes on when the tow mode
function is on.
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
Instruments and controls 2-31
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system is not operating.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC light also comes on when you
place the ignition switch in the ON position.
The light will turn off after about 2 seconds
if the system is operational. If the light stays
indion or comes on along with the
cator light while you are driving, have the
VDC system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
2-32 Instruments and controls
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
LIC2630
The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer
∙ Vehicle settings
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. When the buzzer
sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section of this manual.
∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if
so equipped)
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Cruise control system information
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if so
equipped)
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (if
so equipped)
∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
The ENTER button also controls audio
functions. For additional information, refer
to “Steering wheel switch for audio control”
in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section of this
manual.
∙ Indicators and warnings
∙ Tire Pressure information
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC
(if so equipped) position, the vehicle information display may display the following
screens:
∙ Home
LIC3391
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
butnavigated using the ENTER and
tons located on the steering wheel.
1. ENTER — press to select the vehicle information menu items. Additionally, use
function to navithe UP/DOWN
gate the menu items
2.
— move LEFT/RIGHT to navigate
through the items in the vehicle information display
∙ Off Road
∙ Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped)
∙ DEF Level (if so equipped)
∙ Trip
∙ Fuel Economy
∙ Navigation (if so equipped)
∙ Audio
∙ Driving Aids (if so equipped)
∙ Tire Pressures
∙ Warning Confirmation
∙ Settings
Instruments and controls 2-33
Warning Confirmation will only display if
there are any warnings present. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in
this section.
To control which items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Settings”
in this section.
SETTINGS
∙ Maintenance
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle information display:
∙ Unit
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Meter Settings
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Towing Settings (if so equipped)
∙ Language
∙ Factory Reset
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user
to change the various driving and parking
aids.
∙ Alarm (if so equipped)
Menu item
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Blind Spot (BSW)
Parking Aids (if so equipped)
Moving Object (if so equipped)
Sensor (if so equipped)
Display
Volume
Range
2-34 Instruments and controls
Result
Displays available driving aids. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Displays available parking aids. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Allows the user to turn the sensors on, off, or front only.
Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes.
Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage.
Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to
change the settings for the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Main Menu Selection
Home
Off Road
Auxiliary Gauges
DEF Level (if so equipped)
4x4–i (if so equipped)
Trip
Fuel Economy (if so equipped)
Navigation (if so equipped)
Audio
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
Tire Pressures
TPMS (if so equipped)
Body Color
ECO Drive Report
Display
View History
Welcome Effect
Result
Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the off road monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to “Off Road Monitor” in this section.
Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to “Auxiliary gauges” in this section.
Allows user to turn the DEF LEVEL meter on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional
information, refer to the separate “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Allows user to turn the 4x4–i screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the trip on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to the separate “NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual”.
Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Audio” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to set tire pressure targets.
Allows user to change the color of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to access the ECO drive report.
Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.
Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.
Allows user to customize the available welcome effects.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to
change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item
Lighting
Welcome Light (if so equipped)
Auto Room Lamp
Light Sensitivity (if so equipped)
Light Off Delay (if so equipped)
Turn indicator
3 Flash Pass
Locking
I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)
Selective Unlock
Answer Bk. Horn
Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped)
Off
IGN Off
Shift into P
Wipers
Rain Sensor (if so equipped)
Speed Dependent (if so equipped)
2-36 Instruments and controls
Result
Displays available lighting features of the vehicle.
Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off.
Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.
Displays available turn indicator options.
Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off.
Displays available locking options.
Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the
door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is
pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the
door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be
unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off.
Displays available options for the auto door unlock.
Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Displays available wiper options.
Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer
switch” in this section.
Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and
washer switch” in this section.
Menu item
Memory Seat (ADP) (if so equipped)
Exit Seat Slide
Exit Steering Up
Reverse Tilt Mirror (if so equipped)
Towing Settings (if so equipped)
Trailer light check
Result
Displays available memory seat options.
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat
backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into
the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set
position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
Displays reverse tilt mirror information.
Displays available towing settings options.
Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if connected properly. This feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additional
information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” and “Towing a
trailer” in the Technical and consumer information” sections of this manual.
Alarm
The alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle.
Menu item
Outside Temp.
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)
Phone
Mail
Result
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.
Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.
Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Maintenance
WARNING
The maintenance menu allows the user to
set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
Menu item
Maintenance
Oil Control System (if so equipped)
Oil Filter (if so equipped)
Oil and Filter (if so equipped)
Air Filter
Tire
Brake Pad
Brake Fluid
Battery
Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
DEF Level (if so equipped)
Spark Plug (if so equipped)
Other
2-38 Instruments and controls
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.
Result
Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at specific intervals.
Allows user to view the oil control system maintenance interval.
Allows user to set an oil filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a DEF level reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Unit
The units menu allows the user to change
the units shown in the vehicle information
display.
Menu item
Result
Mileage
Pressure
Temperature
Displays available mileage display units.
Displays available pressure display units.
Displays available temperature display units.
Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Language
Result
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item
Factory Reset
Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or deny the reset.
Instruments and controls 2-39
LIC3761
2-40 Instruments and controls
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
17. Low Outside Temperature
18. Shift to Park
36. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
1. Door Open
19. Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
37. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
2. Release Parking Brake
20. Low Washer Fluid
38. 4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)
3. Range XX miles
21. Cruise control indicator
39. Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)
4. Low Fuel
22. 4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)
5. Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)
23. FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
40. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
6. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Diesel engines only)
7. Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel engines only)
8. AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK
9. AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See
Owner’s Manual
24. Push Ignition to OFF
41. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
25. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
42. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
26. Key ID Incorrect
27. No Key Detected
28. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
10. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
29. Key Battery Low
11. Low Tire Pressure Error — Info
30. Power will turn off to save the battery
12. Flat Tire
31. Power turned off to save the battery
13. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
32. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
14. Push brake and start button to drive
33. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
15. Remote Engine Start Mode (if so
equipped)
16. Brightness indicator
34. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery
35. Maintenance indicators
Door Open
This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message
area of the vehicle information display
when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Press the brake pedal to release the parking brake.
Range XX miles
This warning illuminates to indicate the approximate distance remaining before the
fuel reaches 0 (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-41
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).
Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)
If the Oil Level Low indicator is displayed,
the engine oil level is low. If the low level
reminder is displayed, check the level using
the engine oil dipstick.
CAUTION
The oil level should be checked regularly using the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by the warranty.
Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Diesel
engines only)
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display if low oil
pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil
pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to
2-42 Instruments and controls
check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel engines only)
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display if the oil
level sensor malfunctions. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to
have this system checked.
AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK
If the AT Check warning appears while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate that the AT is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary, repaired
promptly. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See
Owner’s Manual
If this message appears while the engine is
running, or while driving, it may indicate
that the AT is not functioning properly and
may need servicing. Have the system
checked, and if necessary, repaired
promptly. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Low Tire Pressure Error — Info
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected.
button for information
Press the
about the low tire pressure. For additional
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Flat Tire
Brightness indicator
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and one or more flat tires are detected while driving.
This indicator appears when the vehicle
information display screen brightness is
being adjusted.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Extended
storage switch” in this section.
Push brake and start button to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
Remote Engine Start Mode (if so
equipped)
This warning appears in the vehicle information display when the vehicle has been
started using the remote start function. To
start the vehicle, apply the brake and place
the ignition switch in the ON position.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,
a chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position and start the
engine.
Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when the fuel pressure is low. Check the fuel level and refuel if
needed. If the warning remains illuminated,
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. For additional information, re-
fer to “Diesel fuel system” in the “Introduction” of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
CAUTION
Since the fuel pump is lubricated by the
fuel itself, prolonged driving with low
fuel levels may cause progressive damage to the fuel pump. This may cause
the pump to fail.
Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)
These indicators show which 4WD mode is
selected. For additional information, refer
to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-43
FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
This warning may appear if there is a large
difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a
safe area, with the engine idling. Check that
all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire
pressure is correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” of
this manual.
If this warning appears, have your system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with
an unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
The Key System Error message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine
is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However,
in these cases, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Key Battery Low
Push Ignition to OFF
No Key Detected
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
After the Push ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC position
when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Power will turn off to save the battery
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in
the LOCK position.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the LED headlights are not functioning properly.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for a period
of time and then turns off.
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the
ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For
additional information, refer to “Pushbutton ignition switch positions” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Power turned off to save the battery
This warning appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned off to save
the battery.
These will also appear when the user-set
reminders are met. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to “Headlight switch” in this
section.
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
formation, refer to “Fuel-filler door” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the 4-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly
while the engine is running.
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning comes
on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery
4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
This warning appears when the battery is
low and needs to be charged.
This message appears when the vehicle is
shifting into 4WD. For additional information, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ Rear Cross Traffic alert (RCTA)
Maintenance indicators
When engine oil service is due, one or more
of these icons will appear automatically to
remind you. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is
not functioning properly:
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
This warning appears when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional in-
Instruments and controls 2-45
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
because a radar blockage is detected. For
additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
2-46 Instruments and controls
LIC3708
DIESEL WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS (if so equipped)
These warning and indicators apply to the
diesel-only models. For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s
Manual.”
Instruments and controls 2-47
SECURITY SYSTEMS
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the ignition, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
LIC0359
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors or hood when the system
is armed. It is not, however, a motion
detection-type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The
doors can be locked with the Intelligent
Key, door handle request switch, or mechanical key.
security indica4. Confirm that the
tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.
The vehicle security system is now prearmed. The vehicle security system will
automatically shift into the armed
security light begins
phase. The
to flash once every three seconds. If
during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:
∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key, the Intelligent Key or door request switch.
∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON
position.
∙ If the key is turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm.
Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key,
the system may be disarmed when
the key is removed. If the indicator
light fails to glow for a period of time,
unlock the door once and lock it
again.
∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
locked with the ignition switch placed
in the LOCK position. When placing
the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.
∙ The lockable bedside storage compartment (if so equipped) is not protected by the vehicle security system.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again. The alarm can be shut off by
unlocking the driver’s door with the key
button on the
or by pressing the
key fob.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ Opening a door without using the key or
key fob (even if the door is unlocked by
using the inside lock knob or the power
door lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s door with the key or by pressing
button on the key fob.
the
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the
ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-49
For Canada:
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,
LOCK or ACC position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
2-50 Instruments and controls
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some
methyl
alcohol
based
windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
LIC3445
Type A (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
LIC3035
Type B (if so equipped)
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Instruments and controls 2-51
Rotate the end of the lever to operate the
wiper at the following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the
switch is left in the AUTO position, the
wipers may operate unexpectedly
when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate
when exhaust gas or moisture affect
the rain sensor.
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster).
knob toward 䊊
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed. (For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation
4
Rotate the lever the opposite direction 䊊
to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the
wiper.
5
Press the button on the end of the lever 䊊
to operate the washer. The wiper will also
operate several times.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature may be
disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
2-52 Instruments and controls
LIC3446
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and
around it when the wiper switch is in
the AUTO position and the ignition
switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and
cause an injury or may damage a
wiper.
∙ When the windshield glass is coated
with water repellent, the speed of the
rain-sensing auto wipers may be
higher even though the amount of the
rainfall is small.
∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing
auto wiper system when you use a car
wash.
∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain
sensor even if it is raining.
∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is
recommended for proper operation
of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For additional information, refer
to “Windshield wiper blades” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can
automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the
rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the
rain sensor located on the upper part of
the windshield.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
1 .
rotate the lever to the AUTO position 䊊
The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front
B (High) or toward the rear 䊊
A (Low).
䊊
– High — High sensitive operation
– Low — Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system
off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or
rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensor feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in this
section.
LIC2325
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3542
Type B (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass and/or
outside mirrors, start the engine and push
the rear window/outside mirror defroster
switch on. The indicator light on the switch
will illuminate. Push the switch again to
turn the defroster off.
The defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-53
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
NOTE:
If the rear power window (if so equipped)
is open while the defroster switch is on,
the rear window defroster will automatically shut off. The heated outside mirrors
(if so equipped) will remain on. The rear
window defroster will automatically turn
on when the rear power window is fully
closed if the switch is on.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
LIC3379
LIC2049
Type A (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊
2
䊊
2-54 Instruments and controls
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
map lights (if so equipped), and instrument panel lights will come on.
Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on. All
other lights, except the map lights (if so
equipped), will remain on.
NOTE:
CAUTION
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff can be
adjusted. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
LIC3380
Autolight system (if so equipped)
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period
of time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
position.
switch to the OFF,
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
Instruments and controls 2-55
3
䊊
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.
Battery saver system
LIC3487
Be sure you do not put anything on top
1 located on the
of the autolight sensor 䊊
top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked
with the engine off and the ignition
switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
2-56 Instruments and controls
LIC3060
Headlight beam select
1
䊊
2
䊊
To select the high beam function, ensure the low beams are on using the
headlight control switch, then push the
lever forward. The high beam lights
indicator
come on and the blue
light illuminates.
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
or
position, the headlights
the
will turn off after a period of time.
After the headlights automatically turn off
with the headlight switch in the
or
position, the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved
to the OFF position and then turned to
or
position.
the
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.
When traveling without a heavy load or on a
flat road, select position 0.
Select the switch position by referring to
the following sample.
LIC2230
Manual headlight aiming control
(if so equipped)
Depending on the number of occupants in
the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the
headlight axis may be higher than desired.
If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the
headlights may directly hit the rearview
mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light
axis can be lowered with the operation of
the switch.
The larger the number designated on the
switch, the lower the axis.
Vehicle Load
Switch
Position
Driver only or Driver/front
passenger
0
Driver/front seat passenger/
rear seat passengers
1
Driver/front seat passenger/
rear seat passengers/cargo
or driver/cargo/no trailer
2
Fully loaded/no trailer
3
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
The lights in the fog light area automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the
engine is started and the parking brake
released. The Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) operate with the headlight switch in
the OFF position.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate when the parking brake
is released. The DRL remain on while the
engine is running.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so
equipped)
The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminates at 100% intensity
when the engine is started and the parking
brake released. The LED Daytime Running
Lights (LED DRL) operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position. When you turn
position
the headlight switch to the
for full illumination, the LED lights switch
from LED DRL to the park function.
Instruments and controls 2-57
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the
parking brake is released. The LED DRL remain on while the engine is running.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch ON for interior controls and
switches to illuminate, as those remain off
while the switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.
LIC3176
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Press the “+” button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.
1
䊊
Press the “-” button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.
2-58 Instruments and controls
LIC3061
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
HORN
Lane change signal
2
䊊
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass turn indicator may be
disabled. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
LIC2197
LIC2051
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
position, then push the
switch to the
1 on.
fog light switch 䊊
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),
the headlights must be on, then push the
fog light switch on.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.
To turn the fog lights off, push the fog light
switch again.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
Instruments and controls 2-59
CARGO LAMP SWITCH
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCHES (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the climate controlled seats if you or the
occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel
pain in those body parts in contact with
the seat. Use of the climate controlled
seats by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
LIC0616
To turn on the cargo lamp and the under
rail bed lamps (if so equipped) push the
switch down to the ON position. The tailgate lights (if so equipped) will also illuminate when the cargo lamp switch is in the
ON position.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
2-60 Instruments and controls
∙ The battery could run down if the climate control seat is operated while
the engine is not running.
∙ Do not use the climate control seat for
extended periods or when no one is
using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar objects. This may result in
damage to the climate controlled
seat.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should
be removed immediately with a dry
cloth.
∙ The climate controlled seat has an air
filter. Do not operate the climate controlled seat without an air filter. This
may result in damage to the system.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
3. Adjust the desired amount of air using
the control knob. The climate controlled seat blower remains on low
speed for approximately 60 seconds
after turning the switch on or selecting
the desired temperature.
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the control knob
to the Off (center) position. The indicaB on the control knob goes off
tor light 䊊
with the switch in the off (center) position.
SIC4334
The climate controlled seat warms up or
cools down the front seat by blowing warm
or cool air from under the surface of the
seat. The climate control switch is located
on the center console.
The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows:
1. Start the engine.
A to the heat
2. Turn the control knob 䊊
1 or the cool side 䊊
2 . The indicaside 䊊
B on the control knob will illutor light 䊊
minate.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended that you
contact a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
Instruments and controls 2-61
HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
CAUTION
LIC3037
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch
will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
2-62 Instruments and controls
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC3037
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the rear of
the front center console and can be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
Instruments and controls 2-63
HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so
equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off. The switch will turn
off automatically 30 minutes after activation, once this happens the switch will need
to be pressed again to restart the cycle.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the
switch is turned on, the system will not
heat the steering wheel. This is not a
malfunction.
LIC3476
LSD2208
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).
The warning systems switch is used to turn
on and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
system that is activated using the settings
menu on the vehicle information display.
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the engine
starts. The indicator light will come on.
When the warning systems switch is
1 on the switch is
turned off, the indicator 䊊
off. The indicator will also be off if the warning system is deactivated using the settings menu.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.
2-64 Instruments and controls
The BSW system will turn on the BSW/RCTA
indicator light, located next to the outside
mirrors, if the radar detects a vehicle in the
detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
LIC3344
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator will come
OFF switch. The
on.
Instruments and controls 2-65
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
∙ The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under
all load or road conditions. Always be
prepared to depress the brake pedal
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
CAUTION
LIC3447
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle
speed when driving on steep downhill
grades. Always drive carefully when
using the hill descent control system
and decelerate the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely
steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss
of control of the vehicle and possible
serious injury or death.
2-66 Instruments and controls
When the hill descent control system
operates continuously for a long time,
the temperature of the brake pads may
increase and the hill descent control
system may be temporarily disabled
(the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the
system.
The hill descent control system is designed
to reduce driver workload when going
down steep hills. The hill descent control
system helps to control vehicle speed so
the driver can concentrate on steering the
vehicle.
To activate the hill descent control system:
∙ activate the 4H or 4LO switch,
∙ the transmission shift lever must be in
forward or reverse gear,
∙ the hill descent control system switch
must be ON.
The vehicle speed must be kept below
15 mph (25 km/h).
The hill descent control indicator light will
come on when the system is activated.
Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the
hill descent control system applies the
brakes to control vehicle speed.
You may hear a noise from under the hood
or feel a vibration from the actuator when it
is operating. This is normal and indicates
the hill descent control system is working
properly.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating
temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
brake pedal is released, the hill descent
control system begins to function again if
the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
The hill descent control indicator light
blinks if the switch is on and all conditions
for system activation are not met or if the
system becomes disengaged for any reason.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn off the hill descent control system,
push the switch to the OFF position.
When the E-Lock system switch is turned
ON, the indicator light will flash until the
system engages. However, if all operation
conditions listed above are not met or the
system becomes disengaged, the indicator light will continue to flash.
For additional information, refer to “Hill descent control system ON indicator light” in
this section and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) system
is disabled and the ABS light illuminates
when the E-Lock system is on.
LIC3157
The E-Lock system can help provide added
traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming
stuck.
To activate the E-Lock system:
∙ the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles),
∙ the vehicle must be stopped or moving
at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and
∙ the E-Lock system switch must be
turned ON.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual for further explanation and
system limitations.
WARNING
∙ Never leave the E-Lock system ON
when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle
may result in the rear wheels slipping
and result in an accident and personal
injury. After using the E-Lock system
to free the vehicle, turn the system
OFF.
Instruments and controls 2-67
POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)
∙ Use the E-lock system only in an
emergency when it is not possible to
free a stuck vehicle even using 4LO.
Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice
surface. Using the E-Lock system
when driving in these road conditions
may cause unexpected movement of
the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
∙ Observe the above warnings. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control
may result. This may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ After using the E-Lock system, or during normal driving, turn the switch
OFF to prevent possible damage to
drivetrain components from extended use.
∙ When the E-Lock system is in operation, turning the vehicle becomes difficult. This can be dangerous, especially at high speeds. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
2-68 Instruments and controls
∙ Do not operate the E-Lock system
when the vehicle is turning or when
one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,
the drivetrain components could be
damaged.
∙ The E-Lock system operates only
when the engine is running.
∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does
not operate when the E-Lock system
switch is turned to the ON position.
(The E-Lock system indicator light will
flash.)
∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock
system is in operation. Otherwise the
drivetrain components could be
damaged.
∙ Observe the above cautions. Otherwise, loss of normal steering may
result.
LIC2075
To use the outlets for devices that require
120v power, place the ignition in the ON
position and push the power inverter
switch.
The 400W or 150W on the switch will illuminate according to the mode selected. Only
the 150W is available when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position and the
vehicle is being driven. For additional information, refer to “120v outlets” in this section
regarding using devices that require the
power inverter switch activated.
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
The Front and rear sonar system, MOD, or
RCTA systems will be turned on automatically under the following conditions:
CAUTION
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ When the ignition switch is switched
from the OFF position to the ON position.
∙ Do not attempt to use this while
driving.
∙ When the shift lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory, doing
so could significantly drain the battery of your vehicle.
∙ When the vehicle speed increases to
6 mph (10 km/h) and decreases.
LIC3596
The Front and rear sonar system OFF
switch on the instrument panel allows the
driver to turn the Front and rear sonar system, Moving Object Detection (MOD), and
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on
and off. To turn the systems on and off, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
The indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the systems are turned on.
The automatic turning on function can be
turned on and off for these systems in the
vehicle information display (if so equipped).
For additional information, refer to “Settings” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “Front
and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual, or the “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
If the indicator light flashes when the Front
and rear sonar system, MOD, or RCTA systems are not turned off, it may indicate a
malfunction in one or more of these systems.
Instruments and controls 2-69
TOW MODE SWITCH
E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Tow
mode” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
LIC3381
LIC3376
Tow mode should be used when pulling a
heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no
trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not
cause any damage. However, fuel
economy may be reduced, and the
transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in
combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in
case of an emergency.
Push the tow mode switch to activate tow
mode. The TOW indicator light illuminates
when tow mode is selected. Push the tow
mode switch again to turn tow mode off.
Tow mode is automatically canceled when
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
2-70 Instruments and controls
Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription) reach a Response Specialist that will
provide assistance based on the situation
described by the vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle,
refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or
call 855–426–6628.
TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT
(TBCU) (if so equipped)
POWER OUTLETS
LIC3383
LIC3382
The TBCU on the instrument panel allows
the driver to adjust the braking force applied to the trailer brakes.
For additional information, refer to “Towing
a trailer” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Instrument panel
12V OUTLETS
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.
The power outlets located on the instrument panel, inside the center armrest (if so
equipped), and on the back of the center
console (if so equipped) are powered only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.
LIC3385
Inside center console (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Instruments and controls 2-71
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
LIC3784
Rear center console (if so equipped)
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights, or rear
window defroster (if so equipped) is
on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
2-72 Instruments and controls
LIC0617
In truck box (if so equipped)
LIC3384
Center console (if so equipped)
120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)
Before Drive (idling) (Park)
Options
What is plugged IN
Indicator
Nothing plugged but switch
is on
Device<150W
When shifting out of Park
Indicator
150 and 400
Inverter
Status
ON
150
Inverter
Status
ON
150 and 400
ON
150
ON
150W>device<400W
150 and 400
ON
OFF
OFF
Device>400W
150 and 400
OFF
OFF
OFF
When shifting back to
(idling) (Park)
Indicator
Inverter
Status
150 and
ON
400
150 and
ON
400
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Switch Reset
Indicator
NOT
NECESSARY
NOT
NECESSARY
150 and
400
OFF**
Inverter
Status
NOT
NECESSARY
NOT
NECESSARY
ON
OFF**
** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicators
and inverter would remain OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches its peak saturation
point (temp and power level). it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators.
Instruments and controls 2-73
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
Do not use the outlet located in the truck
box with accessories that exceed 120 volt.
Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory. When the dual
wall bed liner is installed (if so equipped),
the power outlet is still accessible through
the access door in the bed liner.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
CAUTION
∙ Operation of the 120 volt system with
the ignition in the ON position and the
engine not running (idle) will drain the
battery charge. This could lead to a
dead battery or no start condition.
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Do not use double adaptors or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
2-74 Instruments and controls
LIC3502
The extended storage switch is used when
shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse
panel inside the glove box. To reach it, open
1 on the instrument panel,
the glove box 䊊
2 .
then open the fuse panel cover 䊊
If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is
ON by pushing it fully in place, as shown.
STORAGE
LIC3266
Pulled position
LIC3268
Pushed position
LIC3397
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
Instruments and controls 2-75
LIC3213
REAR-DOOR POCKETS (if so
equipped)
LIC2392
CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so
equipped)
LIC0575
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pocket(s) may be located on
the back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s
seat, there may be one or two pockets
equipped. The pockets can be used to
store maps.
2-76 Instruments and controls
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
LIC3407
Rear seat (driver’s side shown)
UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if so
equipped)
To access the storage bin, lift the bench
seat toward the rear of the vehicle, then lift
the cover the same direction. The cover
1 if so equipped.
may be locked 䊊
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the tray under the
seat, cargo in the trays should not exceed 20 lbs. (9.08kg).
LIC3408
1 , pull it straight up
To adjust the divider 䊊
and reposition it to the desired location,
sliding it straight down.
Both sides of the storage bin, under the
rear seat on the driver’s and passenger’s
sides, operate similarly. They can be accessed simultaneously or independently of
each other.
Further, to create a flat floor space for storage, rather than access the storage bin, lift
the bench seat as before, then lift the tab
2 and rotate the bin cover toward the
䊊
front of the vehicle. Use the tab as a leg to
support the cover as the new floor space.
Instruments and controls 2-77
Cargo can be secured to the extended
floor with bungee cords. Secure the bungee cords to the loops in the extended
floor.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid damaging the extended
floor, the weight secured should not
exceed 247 lbs. (112 kg).
∙ To avoid damaging the bungee hook
loops, do not exceed 35 lbs. (16 kg) of
force to any given loop.
LIC3406
CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS (if
so equipped)
LIC3386
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
Use the master key to lock or unlock the
glove box lock. The valet key cannot be
used to lock or unlock the glove box lock.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
2-78 Instruments and controls
LIC3399
LIC3400
CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)
WARNING
The center console box should not be
used while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Instruments and controls 2-79
LIC0621
CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so
equipped)
To access the center armrest storage area,
lower the center armrest and lift the lid.
CAUTION
The center armrest storage should not
be used while driving so full attention
may be given to vehicle operation.
2-80 Instruments and controls
LIC3437
Bench seat (center)
UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN
(if so equipped)
To access the storage bin, lift the center of
the front bench seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid damaging the tray under the
seat, cargo in the tray should not exceed 20 lbs. (9.08 kg).
∙ The cushion storage bin should not be
used while driving so full attention
may be given to vehicle operation.
LIC3387
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE (if so equipped)
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.
Instruments and controls 2-81
CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC3401
Front — Type A (if so equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
2-82 Instruments and controls
LIC3512
Front — Type B (if so equipped)
LIC0622
Armrest (if so equipped)
LIC3402
2nd row (rear of front console)
(if so equipped)
LIC3724
2nd row (door armrest) (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-83
LIC0556
2nd row bench (if so equipped)
LIC3396
Front bottle holder
LIC3707
Rear bottle holder (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.
2-84 Instruments and controls
LIC3389
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks allow for standard size
plastic grocery bags to hang side by side.
To access the grocery hooks, fold up the
rear bench seat. For additional information,
refer to “Folding the rear bench seat up” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
LIC3449
BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if so
equipped)
To open the bed liner storage bins on the
top of the wheel wells, unlock the bin and
lift the lid toward the inside of the truck bed.
LIC3450
To open the bed liner storage bins on the
tail gate end of the bed liner, lift the tab
away from the truck bed, pull the lid up and
away from the truck.
To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
18 lbs. (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.
Instruments and controls 2-85
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
LIC3709
CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)
When securing items using cargo hooks,
located on the rear door pillars, do not apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a
single hook.
The cargo hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
2-86 Instruments and controls
LIC3710
C-CHANNEL CARGO HOOKS (if so
equipped)
The C-Channel cargo hooks, located on the
back panel, can be used to secure cargo
with ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using C-Channel
cargo hooks, located on the back panel, do
not apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N)
to a single hook.
WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.
WIC1124
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger side automatic
window switch
Right rear passenger window
switch (if so equipped)
Left rear passenger window switch
(if so equipped)
Driver side automatic window
switch
Instruments and controls 2-87
Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front
and rear (if so equipped) passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and
hold it down. To close a window, pull the
switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.
WIC1125
WIC0261
Front passenger’s power window
switch
Rear power window switch (if so
equipped)
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window, push the switch
1 . To close the window,
and hold it down 䊊
2 .
pull the switch up 䊊
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
1 . To close the window, pull the
it down 䊊
2 .
switch up 䊊
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.
2-88 Instruments and controls
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.
WARNING
LIC0410
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window
switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. To stop the window, push the switch
down while the window is closing.
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate
properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the control unit detects something
caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.
LIC3448
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH (if
so equipped)
WARNING
∙ You must ensure all occupants and
objects are free of the rear window
area prior to and during operation.
Failure to do so may result in injury
and/or damage to the rear window
system.
∙ The rear window is not designed to
carry long items through it.
Instruments and controls 2-89
∙ Do not place objects through the
opened rear window. Do not use the
rear window as a cargo area passthrough. This may result in damage to
the rear window system, or personal
injury.
WARNING
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
NOTE:
If the rear power window is opened while
the defroster switch is on, the rear window defroster (if so equipped) will automatically shut off. The heated outside
mirrors (if so equipped) will remain on.
The rear window defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power
window is fully closed if the switch is on.
LIC3488
REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so
equipped)
WARNING
To close the rear power window, pull out
and hold the switch.
∙ You must ensure all occupants and
objects are free of the rear window
area prior to and during operation.
Failure to do so may result in injury
and/or damage to the rear window
system.
To stop the opening or closing function at
any time, simply release the switch.
∙ The rear window is not designed to
carry long items through it.
To open the rear power window, push in
and hold the switch.
2-90 Instruments and controls
INTERIOR LIGHTS
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a
key or the power door lock switch while
all doors are closed and the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
∙ Do not place objects through the
opened rear window. Do not use the
rear window as a cargo area passthrough. This may result in damage to
the rear window system, or personal
injury.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
1 , then
Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊
2 .
slide the window open 䊊
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is
activated when:
LIC0792
The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
1 ,
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the DOOR or normal
2 , the interior lights,
operation position 䊊
puddle lights (if so equipped), and cargo
light will stay on for a period of time when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is turned ON.
3 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position. The puddle lights (if so
equipped) and cargo light come on when
any front or rear passenger door is opened.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
Instruments and controls 2-91
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
LIC3405
LIC0790
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
To turn the map lights on, push the
switches. To turn them off, push the
switches again.
The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness
control.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
2-92 Instruments and controls
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
LIC0790
Rear personal lights
PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch
again.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
programmed
HomeLink®
Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
security purposes. For additional information,
refer
to
“Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.
WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A
garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically
stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
Instruments and controls 2-93
∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.
2-94 Instruments and controls
LIC2365
LIC2366
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the
1 flashes
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this
section.
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button
is pressed and released.
tenna wire is attached to the unit). If
there is difficulty locating the button,
reference the garage door opener’s
manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty
programming
your
HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
HomeLink®
web
site
at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging an-
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener components.
1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. During training, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every
2 seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then
Instruments and controls 2-95
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed
with
“Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember
to plug it back in when programming is
completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
2-96 Instruments and controls
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button” in this section.
∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
If HomeLink® is not programmed within
that time, try holding the transmitter in
another position – keeping the indicator
light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pressing
the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
NOTE:
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of
each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Instruments and controls 2-97
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-8
Child safety rear door lock (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-22
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Diesel fuel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Gasoline fuel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-29
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Truck box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-42
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can be duplicated without knowing the
key number.
LPD2130
LPD0350
Type B (if so equipped)
Type A (if so equipped)
1.
2.
3.
Master key
Transponder chip
Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1.
2.
3.
Intelligent Key (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
LPD2279
Type C (if so equipped)
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to the
use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the
registration process requires erasing all
memory in the Intelligent Key components
when registering new keys, be sure to take
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the
NISSAN dealer.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, refer to “Doors”
or “Tailgate” in this section.
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet,
give them the Intelligent Key itself, keep the
mechanical key and master key with you to
protect your belongings.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
To prevent the glove box from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the
procedures below:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key or master key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door or tailgate.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key without the
mechanical key to the valet, keep the
mechanical and master key with you.
For additional information, refer to “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual and “Tailgate” in this
section.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
of all key codes previously registered into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
DOORS
given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.
WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
WPD0311
LPD2092
Driver’s side
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH KEY
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
To lock the door without the key, move the
1 , then
inside lock to the lock position 䊊
close the door.
Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock, turn the key
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear 䊊
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
䊊
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WPD0381
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors and the tailgate lock (if
so equipped) without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
1 . When locking
side) to the lock position 䊊
the door this way, be certain not to leave
the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors and the tailgate lock
(if so equipped) without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen2 .
ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊
Lockout protection
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, if
all doors are closed, a chime will sound
after the last door is closed and all doors
will unlock automatically.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
LPD0278
REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)
1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.
LPD2591
2. From the outside, pull the door handle
A toward you.
䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
LPD2592
3. Open the door to the desired position.
LPD2593
LPD2594
CAUTION
Be careful when opening and exiting
the driver’s side rear door if the fuelfiller door is open. This may cause damage to the driver’s side rear door or fuelfiller door if you open fully and they
make contact.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using the “Vehicle Settings”
of the vehicle information display. For
additional information refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments
and Controls” section of this manual (if
so equipped).
LPD2433
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
(if so equipped)
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
2 ,
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door locks using the remote control
function or pushing the request switch on
the vehicle without taking the key out from
a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving
and transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves from various distances. Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver, or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a
yellow indicator illuminates with the message “Warning, Key ID Incorrect” in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so
equipped) will blink green. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display warnings and indicators” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
LPD2338
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
1 (if so equipped).
switch 䊊
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass or handle, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
The operating range is within 31.50 in
1 .
(80 cm) from each request switch 䊊
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2382
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.
∙ Doors and the tailgate lock (if so
equipped) will lock with the door
1 while the
handle request switch 䊊
ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.
∙ Doors and the tailgate lock (if so
equipped) will not lock by pushing the
door handle request switch if any
door is open. However, doors will lock
with the mechanical key even if any
door is open.
LPD2383
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the tailgate lock (if so
equipped) will lock.
LPD2579
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,
the outside chirp sounds twice, and the
front and tail lights may turn on for
10 seconds.
∙ Doors and the tailgate lock (if so
equipped) do not lock with the door
handle request switch if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. A beep
will sound to warn you. However,
when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
∙ Request switches (if so equipped) for
all doors can be deactivated when the
“I-Key Door Lock” setting is switched
to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped). For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make
sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door
handles.
∙ When locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make
sure to have the Intelligent Key in your
possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.
When any door is open, the doors are
locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are
closed; a chime will sound and the lock will
automatically unlock.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2383
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped).
3. The door will unlock and the hazard
indicator lights flash once, the outside
chirp sounds once, and the front and
tail lights may turn on for 30 seconds.
4. Push the door handle request switch
again within one minute.
5. The outside chirp will sound once and
the remaining doors and tailgate lock
(if so equipped) will unlock.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing
the request switch.
∙ Opening any door.
LPD2579
NOTE:
∙ If “Selective Unlock” is turned OFF in
the Vehicle Settings, all doors and
tailgate lock (if so equipped) will un1
lock upon the first request switch 䊊
press.
∙ The request switch can be deactivated when the “I-Key Door Lock” is
switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and
the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors and tailgate lock (if so
equipped) with the remote control.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
∙ Switching the “Auto Room Lamp” to the
OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped). For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.
LPD2257
Locking doors
LPD2258
Unlocking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
1. Press the
Key.
2. Close all doors and tailgate.
2. The driver’s door will unlock, the hazard
indicator light flash once, and the front
and tail lights may turn on for 30 seconds.
3. Press the
gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
button on the Intelligent
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,
the horn beeps once, and the front and
tail lights may turn on for 10 seconds.
3. Press the
one minute.
5. All doors and tailgate lock (if so
equipped) will be locked.
4. The remaining doors and tailgate lock
(if so equipped) will unlock.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
button again within
NOTE:
If Selective Unlock is turned off in the
Vehicle Settings, all doors and tailgate
lock (if so equipped) will unlock upon the
press of the Intelligent Key refirst
mote. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
All doors and tailgate lock (if so equipped)
will be locked automatically unless one of
the following operations is performed
within one minute after pressing the
button:
∙ Opening any doors.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations:
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the
OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped). For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer
than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
WPD0374
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the Intelligent Key for
the
longer than 1 second.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
The panic alarm stops when:
To activate the trailer light check function
with your Intelligent Key, perform the following:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the
button.
∙ The request switch (if so equipped) on
the driver’s door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door
handle.
LOCK
3. Within 2 seconds, press and hold
LOCK button again for at
the
least 2 seconds, until the horn beeps
once and the park lights turn on.
The following events will occur:
LPD2257
Trailer light check (if so equipped)
This functionality allows the customer to
confirm trailer light operation, without the
need of a second person to press the brake
pedal or activate each turn signal light. The
trailer light check can be performed by the
Intelligent Key or through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display (if so
equipped). For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ The left turn signal light on the vehicle
and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.
∙ The right turn signal light on the vehicle
and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.
∙ The brake lights on the vehicle and the
trailer will turn ON for 5 seconds.
NOTE:
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the park lights will turn off after the
events above occur. If ignition switch is
in the ON position, lights will stay on for
45 seconds after trailer light check. If the
trailer lights do not work properly, check
the connections and bulbs. If the vehicle
lights do not turn on, check the bulbs. If
the trailer light check routine fails to
start, ensure the following vehicle conditions:
If you change the answer back horn and
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key
while the ignition is in the ON position, the
vehicle information display screen (if so
equipped) will show the previous mode. The
vehicle information display screen (if so
equipped) will show the current mode after
the ignition switch has been cycled from the
OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen (if so equipped) can also
be used to change the answer back horn
mode. For additional information refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph
(0 km/h)
LPD2259
∙ Brake switch is NOT depressed
Answer back horn feature
∙ Left or right flasher is OFF
If desired, the answer back horn feature
can be deactivated using the Intelligent
Key. When it is deactivated and the
button is pressed, the hazard
LOCK
indicator lights flash twice. When the
button is pressed, neither
UNLOCK
the hazard indicator lights nor the horn
operates.
∙ Trailer light check configuration is NOT
disabled and available in the meter
towing settings
∙ The hazard switch is NOT turned ON
∙ The shift position is fully in P (Park) position
∙ Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entry
range
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard indicator lights will flash three
times to confirm that the answer back
horn feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm that
the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not
silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirp
sounds from inside and outside the vehicle
and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Symptom
The red “Shift to Park” warning apWhen pushing the ignition switch to
pears on the vehicle information disstop the engine
play (if so equipped) and the inside
warning chime sounds continuously.
The door open warning appears on
When opening the driver’s door to get
the display and the inside warning
out of the vehicle
chime sounds continuously.
The yellow “No Key Detected” warning
appears on the vehicle information
display (if so equipped), the outside
chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for apWhen closing the door after getting
proximately three seconds.
out of the vehicle
The red “Shift to Park” warning appears on the vehicle information display (if so equipped) and the inside
and outside chimes sound
continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approxiWhen closing the door with the inside
mately three seconds and all the
lock knob turned to LOCK
doors unlock.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Possible Cause
Remedy
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position or close the driver’s door.
The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
OFF position and the shift lever is not
in the P (Park) position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Symptom
Possible Cause
When pushing the door handle reThe outside chime sounds for approxiThe Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
button on
quest switch or the
mately three seconds.
the Intelligent Key to lock the door
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
Remedy
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key battery indicator
appears on the display.
The battery charge is low.
Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warning
appears on the vehicle information
display (if so equipped).
The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.
Carry the registered Intelligent Key
with you.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system (if so equipped) will default to either heating or cooling mode.
For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using
Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in
view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
LPD2293
The
button will be on the NISSAN Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when the Remote Engine Start feature is
used:
∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control
system (if so equipped) will default to
the last used heating or cooling mode.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in this section.
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range from the vehicle.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The Remote Engine Start operating range
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to
start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
doors.
button to lock all
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
button until the turn signal
the
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
button for at least 2 sechold the
onds.
The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
∙ The parking lights will turn on and remain
on as long as the engine is running.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes.
For additional information, refer to “Extending engine run time” in this section.
Depress and hold the brake then push the
push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
in this section. Run time will be calculated
as follows:
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
or a single Remote Engine Start with an
extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled
to the ON position and then back to the
OFF position before the Remote Engine
Start procedure can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
until the parking lights
and press
turn off.
∙ The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running
for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of
15 minutes.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Extending engine run time will count towards the two Remote Engine Start
limit.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then
OFF.
∙ The extended engine run time has expired.
∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
∙ The engine hood has been opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
∙ The ignition switch is pushed without
an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the
brake pedal is not depressed.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
∙ “Remote Engine Start” is turned off in
the “Locking” section of the Vehicle Settings menu.
button is not pressed and
∙ The
held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.
∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
∙ The I-Key Indicator Light remains solid
in the vehicle information display (if so
equipped).
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
∙ The hazard warning lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable
when extending engine run time.
∙ The remote start function has been
switched to the OFF position in Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
button is not pressed and
∙ The
held for at least 2 seconds.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
HOOD
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LPD2593
LPD0244
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
1
2. Push the lever at the front of the hood
2 as illustrated with your
to the side 䊊
fingertips and raise the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and
make sure it locks into place.
King Cab® models only
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
DIESEL FUEL ENGINES
For additional information, refer to the
separate Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.
LPD2594
King Cab® models only
LPD2434
GASOLINE FUEL ENGINES
CAUTION
Be careful when opening and exiting
the driver’s side rear door if the fuelfiller door is open. This may cause damage to the driver’s side rear door or fuelfiller door if you open fully and they
make contact.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indialso cause the
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message
will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not
properly tightened. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be
displayed. Failure to tighten the fuelfiller cap properly after the Loose Fuel
Cap warning message appears may
Malfunction Indicator
cause the
Light (MIL) to illuminate.
∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malproperly may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
LPD2652
LPD2435
Type A (if so equipped)
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display (if so equipped)
A (if so equipped) when
or trip computer 䊊
the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly
after the vehicle has been refueled. It may
take a few driving trips for the message to
be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as possible.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD2611
Type B (if so equipped)
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single
click is heard.
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.
LPD2597
LPD2580
MANUAL OPERATION (if so
equipped)
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
Tilt and telescopic operation
Pull the lock lever 䊊 down:
1
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired position.
direction 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
3 to the desired
backward in direction 䊊
position.
1 up firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever 䊊
steering wheel in place.
To adjust the steering wheel move the
1 in the following directions:
switch 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
2 to the desired tilt position.
direction 䊊
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
3 to the desired
backward in direction 䊊
telescopic position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
SUN VISORS
CAUTION
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering
wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has
been discharged, may prevent the
steering wheel position from being
adjusted.
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering
operation must be reset after the vehicle’s
battery has been discharged in order to
prevent the tilt and telescopic operation
from locking in one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:
Entry/Exit function (if so
equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system (if
so equipped) will make the steering wheel
move up automatically when the driver’s
door is opened and the ignition switch is in
the LOCK position. This lets the driver get
into and out of the seat more easily. The
steering wheel moves back into position
when the driver’s door is closed and the
ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
1
∙ For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊
so the steering wheel moves to the
2
that can be
highest position 䊊
reached.
∙ For telescopic operation: Adjust the
1 so the steering wheel moves
switch 䊊
to the most forward and backward po3 that can be reached.
sition 䊊
Performing these operations resets the
range of the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WPD0344
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 the sun visor.
down 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
2 .
and swing the visor to the side 䊊
3 in or
3. To extend the sun visor, slide 䊊
out as needed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
LPD2583
LPD2436
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and
turn on when the mirror cover is open.
To access the card holder, slide card in the
card holder. Do not view information while
operating the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 to reduce glare
Use the night position 䊊
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.
LPD0469
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors 䊊
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.
2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Type A - Without compass
(if so equipped)
Type A (if so equipped)
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the O button. The indicator light
will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature
again, press the | button. The indicator
light will turn on.
For additional information, refer to the
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
For additional information, refer to the
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
LPD2419
Type B - With compass (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button. The indicator light will
the
turn off.
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD2581
Manual control type (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors can be moved in any
direction for a better rear view.
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
button again. The indicator
the
light will turn on.
For additional information about the com3 , refer to
pass and compass features 䊊
“Compass” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror
can be moved manually in any direction for
a better rear view.
LPD0346
Electric control type (if so
equipped)
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
Rotate the control dial to select the right or
left mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired
position by moving the control dial.
Return the control dial to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.
LPD2474
Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)
WARNING
Objects viewed in the convex portion of
the trailer tow mirror are closer than
they appear. Be careful when changing
lanes or turning. Using only the convex
mirror could cause an accident. Use the
other mirrors or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other
objects.
Use the outside mirror remote control to
adjust the top portion of the trailer tow
mirror.
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Push the switch to open or close the mirrors.
If one of the mirrors are manually operated
or bumped, the mirror body can become
loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by
pushing the “CLOSE” switch until completely closed, then push the “OPEN” switch
until the mirrors are in the open position.
LPD0268
Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to the desired position for better
visibility while towing a trailer.
WARNING
Do not extend or retract mirrors while
driving. You may lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD0417
Power folding outside mirrors (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not manually fold the power folding
mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors
can damage the mirrors.
CAUTION
Driving in tight spaces with mirrors extended may cause damage to the
vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in
the “center” position, the mirror surface
will NOT turn downward when the shift
lever is moved to R (Reverse).
For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
Automatic anti-glare outside
mirror (if so equipped)
LPD2634
Type A (if so equipped)
Manual folding outside mirrors (if
so equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both
outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle
when the mirror control switch is in either
the L or R position.
LPD0269
Type B (if so equipped)
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R
(Reverse).
The outside mirror surfaces will return to
their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred:
∙ The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
∙ The outside mirror control switch is set
to the neutral or center position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The outside mirror will automatically dim
during nighttime conditions to reduce the
glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature
operates only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on
when starting the vehicle. The indicator
light on the automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror will illuminate when the automatic
anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button on the rearview mirror.
the
The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the anti-glare feature again,
button on the rearview mirpress the
ror. The indicator light will turn on.
TRUCK BOX
For additional information on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror, refer to
“Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in
this section.
For additional information on proper truck
box loading, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
WARNING
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat (if so
equipped) when it is in the folded position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could
result in serious injury or death in an
accident or sudden stop.
LPD2334
TAILGATE
Opening the tailgate
Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower
the tailgate. The support cables hold the
tailgate open.
When closing the tailgate, make sure the
latches are securely locked.
∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate
down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s
Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent
in the extended position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove
box and connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to avoid contamination
which will lead to malfunction of the
rear camera.
7. Remove the tailgate. For additional information, refer to “Removing the tailgate” in this section.
LPD2582
Disconnecting the rear camera (if
so equipped)
Before removing the tailgate disconnect
the rear camera by performing the following:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
1 located
camera connector bracket 䊊
on the rear sill.
2
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart.
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness
3 by pressing inward on the locking
䊊
tab, in the direction shown, while pulling
the connectors apart. Hold the connector firmly to prevent the connector
in the chassis harness from falling into
the sill.
4. Use the supplied chassis plug and
bracket and connect them to the
chassis wiring harness to avoid contamination to the terminals which will
lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people
should remove or install it. Be careful
not to drop it during removal.
∙ After releasing the support cables, do
not let the tailgate rest on the
bumper.
4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be sure
the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate and keep the tailgate
open. For additional information, refer
to “Connecting the rear camera” in this
section before closing the tailgate.
5. For vehicles without rear camera: Close
the tailgate securely.
3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.
4. Pull the tailgate out from the left side
hinge.
LPD0271
Removing the tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the
rear camera (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to “Disconnecting the rear camera” in this section.
2. Release the tailgate support cables.
5. Slide the tailgate out of the right side
hinge.
Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the right side
hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle
and insert into the left side hinge.
3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45
degree angle and attach the tailgate
support cables.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39
6. Securely fix the rear camera connector
1 to the rear sill.
bracket 䊊
7. Close the tailgate securely.
LPD2582
Before closing the tailgate reconnect the
rear camera by performing the following:
3. Disconnect the chassis plug and
bracket from the chassis wiring har3 . Keep the connector and
ness 䊊
bracket in a safe place such as the
glove box.
1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the
truck, keep the tailgate open and check
that the tailgate harness is not hanging
below the tailgate.
4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the
tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug in a safe place such as the
glove box.
2
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart.
5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to
the chassis wiring harness.
Connecting the rear camera (if so
equipped)
3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
LPD2388
LPD2393
Locking the tailgate
TIE DOWN HOOKS
To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward
1 . To
the passenger side of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
lock, turn the key toward the driver side 䊊
For your convenience, tie down hooks are
placed at each corner of the truck box.
These may be used to help secure cargo
loaded into the truck box.
∙ The weight of the cargo load must be
evenly distributed over the rear axles.
∙ All cargo should be securely fastened
with ropes or straps to prevent it from
shifting or sliding within the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so
equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has
two features:
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column, and outside mirrors (if so
equipped) to the desired positions by
manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, refer
to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and “Steering wheel” and “Outside mirrors” in this
section.
∙ Memory storage function
∙ Entry/exit function
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
LPD2302
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering
column, and outside mirrors (if so
equipped) can be stored in the automatic
drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position (the vehicle should be stopped
while setting the memory).
3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON and stay
ON for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound if the memory
has been stored.
NOTE:
If a NEW memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous
memory position will be overwritten by
the new stored position.
Confirming memory storage
Push the SET switch.
∙ If a memory position has been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light
for the respective switch will stay ON for
approximately 5 seconds.
Linking a key fob to a stored
memory position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored
memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)
with the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage
function” section for storing the
memory position.
2. The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come ON. While the
indicator light is ON for 5 seconds,
button on the key fob.
press the
The hazard lights will flash twice. The
indicator light of the linked memory
switch will blink and click twice. After
the indicator light goes off, the key fob
is linked to that memory setting.
Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, pressing
button on the key fob will move
the
the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to the linked memory switch
position.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the
linked memory switch, then the key fob
will link the new position and overwrites
the previous position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s
seat and automatic operation steering column will automatically move when the
shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This
allows the driver to get into and out of the
driver’s seat more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering column will move up:
∙ When the driver’s door is opened with
the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position.
∙ When the ignition switch is changed
from ACC to OFF with the driver’s door
open.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
return to the previous position:
∙ When the ignition switch is changed
from ACC or ON while the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or
canceled through the vehicle settings in
the vehicle information display (if so
equipped) by performing the following:
∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to
OFF.
∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to
OFF.
Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the stored memory positions
will be lost and some of the functions will
be restricted:
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver’s door more
than two times with the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work
properly.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
∙ When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some
limited functions such as linking a key
fob to the meter when the power
source is turned on from off or during
the exit function.
∙ When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
∙ When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat and steering column is turned
on while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
∙ When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
∙ When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
∙ When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
3-44 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-45
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
BACK button. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the
How to use the [
] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . .4-11
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-15
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Intelligent Around View Monitor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
How to park with predicted course
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Turning MOD on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-49
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
iPod®* player operation without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-85
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-87
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . .4-88
NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) . . . . . .4-89
Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Siri® Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models with navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System (MES)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Front panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Front panel buttons operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Wireless Headphone Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Remote control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98
Remote Control Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
General operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
How to use the DVD OSD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
How to use the Monitor OSD Menu . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Playing a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Playing Audio Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Playing Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Playing Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Charging a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Connecting an External Auxiliary A/V
Source — Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Connecting an External A/V Monitor —
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Selecting Monitor A or B as the Source . . . . . 4-116
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
FCC Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
ITE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
WEEE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Macrovision Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Dolby Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . 4-120
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Navigation system voice commands . . . . . . . 4-145
Audio system voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Information voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
My Apps voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Help voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
LHA3904
1. POWER button/VOLUME control knob
5.
2. Display screen
6.
(brightness control) button
3. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE-SCROLL
knob
7.
button**
4.
BACK button
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
button
8. MAP button*
9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
* For additional information regarding the
navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
** For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button, refer to “Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and
the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
LHA3712
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123/ABC
Space
Delete
OK
Result
Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the
BACK
button to return to the previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Changes the available character set to numbers.
Inserts a space.
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the
characters.
Completes the character input.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
HOW TO USE THE
BUTTON
BACK
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous screen.
LHA3711
HOW TO USE THE [
] BUTTON
For additional information about the
“SiriusXM Travel Link”, and “Traffic” features,
refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
For additional information about the “My
Apps” key, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile
Apps” in this section.
LHA3712
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
For additional information about the “Voice
Commands” key, refer to “NISSAN Voice
Recognition System” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Menu item
Audio
Phone & Bluetooth
System
Display
Brightness
Display Mode
Scroll Direction
Clock /Date
Time Format
Date Format
Clock Mode
Set Clock / Date Manually
Daylight Savings Time
Time Zone
Language
NissanConnect Services Settings (if so
equipped)
Camera Settings
Display Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color
Result
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this
section.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will
appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes
are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Touch this key to adjust the time.
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” will be selected from the option
below.
Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or
down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to connect to NissanConnect® Service.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Adjust touch-screen brightness using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.
Adjust touch-screen contrast using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.
Adjust touch-screen color using the TUNE-SCROLL knob/ ENTER button.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu item
Temperature Unit
Touchscreen Click
System Beeps
Return to Factory Settings/Clear
Memory
Software Licenses
Minimize Voice Feedback
System Software Version
Traffic
Navigation
SXM
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
button and use the TUNEthe
SCROLL knob / ENTER-AUDIO button to adjust the brightness. Pressing the button
again will change the display to day or
night display mode.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous
display.
Result
Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key
on the screen is touched.
Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up
button) is pressed and held for
message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the
2 seconds.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to turn ON or OFF to control the voice feedback.
Touch this key to display software version information.
Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “RearView Monitor” or “Intelligent Around View
Monitor” in this section.
button for more
Press and hold the
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
the button again to turn the display on.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
LHA4485
1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the
CAMERA button (if so equipped) will cycle
through guideline options. The radio can
still be heard while the RearView Monitor is
active.
LHA3671
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
1 on the
above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊
tailgate.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
6
Center guide lines (if so equipped) 䊊
Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve
trailer hitching guidance.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
LHA3907
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3672
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further
than it appears on the monitor.
LHA3673
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4542
LHA3674
Backing up near a projecting
object
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
LHA3639
Models without navigation system
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display
settings of the screen differs depending on
the type of screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without navigation system
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse)
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness
settings.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4296
Models with navigation system
4. Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button
again to display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting up or down.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to
complete the adjustment.
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
For vehicles with navigation system
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse)
2. Press the
panel.
button on the control
3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
button again to access
5. Press the
the Auto settings.
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed on the tailgate.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
LHA3671
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)
LHA4092
1. CAMERA button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the
Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is
a convenience feature and is not a
substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are
areas where objects do not always
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear
views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always
operate the vehicle slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel
parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
∙ Rear-Wide View
An approximately 180–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3909
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one on the tail1 .
gate 䊊
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around
View Monitor.
When the camera is first activated with the
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so
equipped) will flash on the screen. This indicates that the sonar system (if so
equipped) is activated. For additional information on the front and rear sonar system
(if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after
the CAMERA button has been pressed with
the shift lever in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The apparent
distance viewed on the monitor may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’seye view as a reference. The lines and
the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants,
cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road
condition and road grade.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted
course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right, because the
rearview camera is not installed in the
rear center of the vehicle.
∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they
appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
7
Center guide lines 䊊
Indicates the vehicle’s center to improve
trailer hitching guidance.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
SAA1840
LHA3920
Front view
Front and rear view
Rear view
5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
A are
reference to the vehicle body line 䊊
displayed on the monitor.
Indicate the approximate vehicle width
when backing up.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊
3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊
6
Predicted course lines 䊊
Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
6 are displayed.
predicted course lines 䊊
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
2 is highlighted in
The non-viewable area 䊊
yellow for several seconds after the bird’seye view is displayed. It will be shown only
the first time after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
LHA4394
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
vehicle position and the predicted course
to a parking space.
1 shows the position of
The vehicle icon 䊊
the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird’seye view may differ somewhat from the
actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
2 are indicated in black.
䊊
∙ Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
∙ A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views. The
misalignment will increase as the line
proceeds away from the vehicle.
LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
1 shows the front
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
part of the vehicle.
2 shows the apThe side-of-vehicle line 䊊
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
3 of both the front 䊊
1 and
The extensions 䊊
2 lines are shown with a green dotted
side 䊊
line.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
LHA3672
LHA3673
Backing up on a steep uphill
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the actual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
LHA3912
LHA3674
Backing up near a projecting
object
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
∙ There is the possibility that when the
vehicle mirrors are extended for towing, the mirrors may be shown in the
bird’s-eye view and front side view.
LHA3910
LHA3911
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the preB enter the parkdicted course lines 䊊
C .
ing space 䊊
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
A when the shift lever is
on the screen 䊊
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel
the vehicle width guide lines 䊊
C while referring
to the parking space 䊊
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press
the CAMERA button to switch between the
available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,
the only available view is front view/frontside view split screen.
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
∙ A different screen is selected.
LHA4295
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Firmly apply brake and place the shift
lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the
panel.
button on the control
3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
button again to access
5. Press the
the Auto settings.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
the setting up or down.
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Intelligent Around View Monitor.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the Intelligent Around View Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied.
∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View
Monitor with the outside mirrors in
the stored position, and make sure
that the tailgate is securely closed
when operating the vehicle using the
Intelligent Around View Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around
View Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above
the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the
cameras.
LHA3807
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system does
not warn of moving objects. When in the
front or rear view display, an object below
the bumper or on the ground may not be
1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
viewed 䊊
2 of the camera
object near the seam 䊊
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
objects clearly.
∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not be clear and the color
of the object may differ in a dark environment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
has been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
LHA3591
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not
hinder normal driving operation but it is
recommended that the system be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
1 , the Intelligent Around View
the cameras 䊊
Monitor may not display objects clearly.
Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
LHA3592
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but it is recommended that the system be inspected
if it occurs frequently. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA3909
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)
LHA4092
1. CAMERA button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
WARNING
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ The MOD system is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation and is not
designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When
maneuvering, always use the outside
mirrors and rearview mirror and turn
and check the surroundings to ensure
it is safe to maneuver.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the
camera screen is displayed.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
∙ The MOD system is not designed to
detect
surrounding
stationary
objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when
backing out of garages, maneuvering in
parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects
by using image processing technology on
the image shown in the display.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4190
Front and bird’s-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is displayed:
∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.
LHA4200
Rear and bird’s-eye views
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the front view.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the
MOD system detects moving objects in
the rear view. The MOD system will not
operate if the tailgate is open.
LHA4201
Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when in
this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard
and a yellow frame will be displayed on the
view where the objects are detected. While
the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to
be displayed.
LHA4242
Rear-wide view
NOTE:
While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is
beeping, the MOD system will not chime.
1 is
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
2 is displayed on each
The yellow frame 䊊
view in the front view and rear view modes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
3 is displayed in the view
A blue MOD icon 䊊
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
3 is not displayed.
icon 䊊
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
Some vehicles include the option to allow
the MOD system to be turned on or off in
the vehicle information display.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
buttons on the steer1. Using
ing wheel to select “Settings”.
2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the
ENTER button.
3. Select “Parking Aids”.
4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using the ENTER button.
MOD can also be turned on or off by using
the Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF
Switch. For additional information, refer to
“Parking Sensor (sonar) System OFF
Switch” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle
in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may not
function properly.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
∙ The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental
conditions and surrounding objects
such as:
– When there is low contrast between background and the moving
objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
– When camera orientation is not in
its usual position, such as when a
mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.
∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens,
white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
∙ The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed,
leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered and the
MOD system may not detect objects
properly.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.
NOTE:
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
1 , the MOD system may not
the cameras 䊊
operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.
The blue MOD icon will change to orange
if one of the following has occurred:
∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate
orange, have the MOD system checked. It
is recommended that you visit an
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA3909
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
VENTS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
LHA3772
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and
1 , center vents 䊊
2 ,
passenger’s side vents 䊊
and rear passengers’ vents (if so equipped)
3 by moving the vent slide and/or vent
䊊
assemblies.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
LHA4127
CONTROLS
1.
Fan speed control / system OFF
dial / air conditioning (A/C) button
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
4.
5.
6.
Air recirculation button
Outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
Front windshield defrost button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Fan control dial
Temperature control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
Fan control dial — OFF Mode
Setting the
fan control dial to the off
position will turn off the fan and the air recirculation indicator light will turn on. To get
air
fresh air in fan off mode, press the
recirculation button to turn off the indicator.
In fan off mode, the mode buttons can be
selected to change the air vent distribution
(if the air recirculation mode is off).
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to
select the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C
Air recirculation button
ON position (Indicator light on)
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
when:
button to the ON position
∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
— Air flows from center and side
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
vents with maximum cooling.
air conditioner.
— Air flows from center and side
OFF position (Indicator light off)
vents.
If outside air is desired in off mode, press
— Air flows from center and side
the recirculation button until the indicator
vents and foot outlets.
turns off.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
front
If fogging occurs, press the
— Air flows from defroster outwindshield defrost button.
lets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Outside mirror defroster (if so
equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and / or outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion for normal heating. The indicator
button will go off.
light on the
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion. The indicator light on the
button will go off.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the
defrost/defog button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
fan control dial
windows, turn the
to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. Under this condition, the indicator light on
the A/C button indicator will not turn on
if the user had selected the A/C off.
Turning off the air conditioning via the
A/C button is not allowed In this mode. If
the A/C button indicator was on when
entering this mode, and the A/C button
is selected in this mode, the A/C button
indicator will turn off, but the A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. The recirculation button indicator will not illuminate if the button is
pressed in this mode.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion.
The
indicator
light
on
button will go off.
the
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
∙ When the
position is selected, the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
air flow control
36°F (2°C). If the
button is selected for more than 1 minute, the air conditioning system will
fan
continue to operate until the
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle
is shut off, or the A/C button is used to
turn off the compressor even if the air
flow control dial is turned to a position
position. This deother than the
humidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. Under this condition, the indicator light on the A/C button indicator
will not turn on if the user had selected
A/C off. Turning off the air conditioning
via the A/C button is not allowed in this
mode. If the A/C button indicator was
on when entering this mode, and the
A/C button is selected in this mode, the
A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. It is recommended
mode be turned off for maxithat
mum defogging. The recirculation button can be selected in this mode to
block outside odors. However, for maximum defogging in this mode, it is recommended to turn recirculation off
when possible.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
button to activate the air condithe
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
tion.
button to the OFF posi-
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the cold position.
∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button to the ON position. Be sure to
return the
to the OFF position for
normal cooling. The indicator light on
button will go off. You may
the
also select MAX A/C for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion. The indicator light on the
button will go off.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Press the
button on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
front defroster button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
or
positions are seWhen the
lected, the air conditioner automatically
turns on if the outside temperature is more
than 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system
fan
will continue to operate until the
control dial is turned to OFF, the air conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is shut
off, even if a position other than the
air flow control button is selected. Under
this condition, the indicator light on the A/C
button indicator will not turn off if the user
had selected A/C off. Turning off the air
conditioning via the A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If the A/C button indicator was on when entering this mode, and
the A/C button is selected in this mode, the
A/C button indicator will turn off, but the
A/C compressor will still be automatically
enabled. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or
3 minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows.
This allows the air conditioner to cool
the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. For additional information on heating and cooling,
refer to “Heater and air conditioner
(manual)” in this section. The air recircula) button should always be in
tion (
the OFF position for heating and defrosting.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
LHA4486
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4487
LHA4488
LHA4489
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
LHA4490
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
10.
11.
ON-OFF button
Rear window
outside mirror (if so
and/or
equipped) defroster switch
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
LHA3575
1.
2.
3.
4.
Front defroster button
Temperature control dial (driver’s
side)/AUTO button
Display screen
Temperature control dial (passenger’s side)/DUAL button
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Fresh air intake button
Air recirculation button
A/C air conditioner button
MODE (manual air flow control)
button
Fan speed control buttons
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year
round as the system automatically works
to keep a constant temperature. Air flow
distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or
right to set the desired temperature.
Driver and passenger temperatures
can be set independently. Press the
DUAL button to activate dual climate
control functions. Turn the passenger’s
side temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired passenger’s
temperature.
∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed
and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically. The A/C button indicator will
remain in the last user setting. Under
this condition, the indicator light on the
A/C button indicator will not turn on if
the user had not selected the A/C button off. Turning off the air conditioning
via the A/C button is not allowed in this
mode. If the A/C button indicator was
on when entering this mode, and the
A/C button is selected in this mode, the
A/C button indicator will turn off, but the
A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. For additional information, refer to “Air flow control” in this section.
To turn off the compressor, turn off auto
mode, then turn the A/C on then off
until the A/C button indicator is not lit.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
the left or the right to set the desired
temperature. Driver and passenger
temperatures can be set independently. Press the DUAL button to activate dual climate control functions.
Turn the passenger’s side temperature
control dial to the left or right to set the
desired passenger’s temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
defroster control button to turn the system on. The indicator
light in the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or
right to set the desired temperature.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
fan
of the windows, press the
speed control button to the maximum
position.
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the auto mode.
control is activated, the
∙ When the
air conditioner will automatically be
turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the
air which helps defog the windshield.
Under this condition, the indicator light
on the A/C button indicator will not turn
on if the user had selected A/C off. Turning off the air condition via the A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If the
A/C button indicator was on when entering this mode, and the A/C button is
selected in this mode, the A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. The air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin
temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster and
heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may
be activated automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
fan speed control buttons
Press the
to manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
When adjusting the manual fan from auto
mode,
the
outlet
direction
(floor,
floor/defrost, vent, bi-level) will still automatically change. To fix the outlet to a
manual mode, select the desired air flow
location using the MODE button.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Air recirculation
Fresh air intake
Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle
when:
Press the
fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger compartment.
∙ driving on a dusty road
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioning system.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in
mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds
70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may
default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption.
To exit air recirculation mode, select the
fresh air intake button to enter fresh air
mode.
In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculation
button can be selected to block outside
odors. However, for maximum defogging in
this mode, it is recommended to turn recirculation off when possible.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. When the outside
temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air
conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce
overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake
button to enter fresh air mode. The air recirculation indicator will turn off, the fresh
air indicator will turn on.
To manually control the intake air, press
fresh air intake button. To return
the
to the automatic control mode if
fresh air indicator is illuminated,
the
press and hold the
fresh air intake
button for about 2 seconds. The fresh air
indicator and air recirculation indicator
lights will flash twice, and then the intake air
will be controlled automatically. To return
to the automatic control mode if
air recirculation icon is illumithe
nated, press and hold the
air recirculation button for about 2 seconds.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
air
recirculation
indicator
The
and
fresh air intake indicator lights
will flash twice and the intake air will be
controlled automatically.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan speed
control dial to the desired position and
button to turn on the air
press the
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,
button again.
press the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Press the MODE button to manually control
air flow and select the air outlet.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.
To turn system off
∙ When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant
temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum
of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a
malfunction. After the engine coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.
Press the ON-OFF button.
Rear window and / or outside
mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and / or outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
LHA4126
OPERATING TIPS
1 , loThe sunload sensor (if so equipped) 䊊
cated on the top center of the instrument
panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on
or around this sensor.
∙ When the outside and interior cabin
temperatures are moderate to high, the
intake setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode, or side demist vent outlets for a
maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when previous climate setting was
system off. This is not a malfunction.
After the initial warm air is expelled, the
intake will return to automatic control,
air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control
button.
∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select
mode.
the
∙ When you change the air flow mode,
you may feel air flow from the feet vents
for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
RADIO
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced
technician
with
proper
equipment.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
With the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON
or POWER button
position, press the
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio
with the engine not running, the ignition
should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and
“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band
option is selected unless optional satellite
receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Compact disc (CD) player
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA
∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
Terms
∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible
loss
in
quality.
MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression
than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of
more digital audio tracks in the same
amount of space when compared to
MP3s at the same level of quality.
∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the display.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
WHA1078
Playback order chart
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1
WMA
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is
not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM
Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Cannot play
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Moves immediately to
the next song when playing
Songs do not play back
in the desired order
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon and
Bosch.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
6. SCAN button
7.
TRACK button
8.
BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10. ENTER/SETTING
FOLDER knob
button
/
TUNE/
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
14.
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
15. DISP (display) button
16. MEDIA button
17. FM•AM button
Audio main operation
LHA4290
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
2. CD button
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
4. CD insert slot
1.
CD eject button
3. Display screen
5.
SEEK button
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
Audio
Bluetooth
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness and Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sensitive Vol. (volume)
AUX Vol.
Language select
Auto Source Change
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.
Adjusts Bluetooth® settings.
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed
of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is plugged into USB
port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when device is plugged into
USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod MENU button
TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
SEEK tuning
Press the
or
SEEK buttons to
tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the SCAN button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
SEEK button or the
the
TRACK button. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1
– 6) until the preset number is updated
on the display and a beep is heard.
3. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text informa-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button
SEEK/TRACK button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK/TRACK button several times
the
to skip backward several tracks.
SEEK/TRACK button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
SEEK/TRACK butone track. Press the
ton several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
RPT (repeat) button
CD with MP3 or WMA:
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
CD:
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the
compact disc will be ejected further for
easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” regarding the iPod® player available
with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System)” regarding the USB connection port available
with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System” about the Bluetooth® audio
interface available with this system in this
section.
LHA4300
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, refer to “Audio operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. XM button*
3. Display screen
4. CD insert slot
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
5.
Audio main operation
SEEK button
6. SCAN button
7.
CAT button
8.
BACK button
9. iPod MENU button
10. ENTER/SETTING
SCROLL knob
button
/
TUNE/
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
14.
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
15. DISP (display) button
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
16. MEDIA button
17. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.
Audio
Bluetooth
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)
AUX Vol.
Language Select
Auto Source Change
Adjusts Bluetooth® settings
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed
of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is plugged into USB
port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when device is plugged into
USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
iPod MENU button
XM band select
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
(power) conwhen the VOL (volume)/
trol knob/button is pressed on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
CAT
button to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the SCAN button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
or
SEEK/CAT button.
the
Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until the
preset number is updated on the display and a beep is heard.
3. Programming is now complete.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current
disc are displayed on the screen as well.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/CAT button for 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to
normal play speed.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
SEEK/CAT button
SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK/CAT button several times to
the
skip backward several tracks.
SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
SEEK/CAT button
one track. Press the
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the
compact disc will be ejected further for
easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” regarding the iPod® player available
with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System)” regarding the USB connection port available
with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System” about the Bluetooth® audio
interface available with this system in this
section.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
7.
TRACK button
8.
SEEK button
9. Display screen
10. AUX button
11. CD button
12. FM-AM button
13. SXM button*
] button launches the SmartThe [
phone Integration Mode. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile
Apps” in this section.
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
LHA3906
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
3. CD insert slot
4. ENTER/AUDIO
knob
1. POWER button / VOLUME control knob
5.
2.
6.
CD eject button
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
button/TUNE/SCROLL
BACK button
button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Audio main operation
POWER button/VOLUME control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then press the POWER button
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the POWER
button.
Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust
the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
Audio settings
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following items to the desired setting:
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Vol.
AUX Volume Level
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the
speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the
volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until
the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SXM settings
SXM band select
To view the SXM settings:
Pressing the SXM button will change the
band as follows:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
SXM1* → SXM2*→ SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite, if
so equipped)
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and
other information are displayed on the
screen.
When the SXM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the last station
played.
AUX button
The last station played will also come on
when the VOL (volume) control knob is
pressed to turn the radio on.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio
is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
nel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a
list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options within
that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up
the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the
lower right corner of the screen. A screen
appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on
the right. Touch the screen at the location
of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To
return to the regular radio display screen,
touch the “OK” key.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to change the channel.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation can be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch the “Channels” key to display
a list of channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to change to that chan-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
SEEK/TRACK tuning
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
When in FM or AM mode, press the
SEEK button or
TRACK button to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
SEEK
When in SXM mode, press the
button or
TRACK button to change
the category.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching
the desired preset number on the screen.
LHA2899
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be
set for the AM band. Eighteen stations can
be set for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for
SXM2 and 6 for SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or
choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 and
SXM3 using the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or seek tuning. Press and hold
any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6
Station memory operations” in this section.
LHA3085
Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if
so equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the
user to designate presets, within the SXM1,
SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any of the Smart Favorite
presets are selected, the current track on
that station will play from the beginning of
the song.
NOTE:
LHA3087
• Smart Favorites will start functioning
only after the audio unit is turned on for
a few minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music channels only.
Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability
to replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay Screen is prompted.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
REPLAY
To replay a track from
the beginning, press
the
seek button.
The user can continue to
press the
seek button to replay previous
songs, but can only go
back as far as the system permits. The system
will warn the user when
they cannot skip any further back by displaying
“At the End” in the bottom left corner of the
screen.
SKIP
PAUSE
REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD
To skip a track, press
the
track button.
“Live” will appear in the
bottom left corner of the
screen indicating the difference from play time to
live audio.
To pause a track, press
the
pause button.
To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or
seek/track
button.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode
Random
Repeat
Browse
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when
a CD is playing:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” key alternates between the Random Folder and Random All. This text will appear on
the display. To cancel random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer
highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching
“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text
will appear on the display. To cancel repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer
highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the
list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the
folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a
folder.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
CD EJECT button
Fast Forward) buttons
Press and hold the
SEEK button
TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while
or
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
SEEK button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK button several times to skip
the
backward several tracks.
TRACK button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
TRACK button several
track. Press the
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track
on the disc is played. If the last track in a
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
When the
CD eject button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,
the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation with Navigation System”
in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models with Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System” in this section.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3794
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the instrument
panel beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into
the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack located on the
instrument panel, the MEDIA button
toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Reverse or Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/CAT
and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to
reverse or fast forward the track being
played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
several times to skip backbutton
ward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to advance one track. Press the
several
SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
TUNE/SCROLL knob (If so equipped)
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to change folders. Turn the knob to
the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob
to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is
only one folder of audio files on the USB
device, turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob in
either direction will return to the first track
on the USB device.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (if so equipped)
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER
knob to change folders. Turn the knob to
the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob
to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is
only one folder of audio files on the USB
device, turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob in
either direction will return to the first track
on the USB device.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3794
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the instrument
panel beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into
the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another
audio source is playing and a USB memory
device is inserted, press the AUX button
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, press the
POWER button to restart the USB memory.
LHA4006
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played is shown on the display screen of
the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”
to display the list of folders and files on the
USB device. Touch the name of a song on
the screen to begin playing that song.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
SEEK/TRACK button while
Press the
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track.
SEEK/TRACK button sevPress the
eral times to skip backward several tracks.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Press the
SEEK/TRACK while an audio
file on the USB device is playing to advance
SEEK/TRACK
one track. Press the
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next
folder is played.
Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the
play pattern can be altered so that songs
are repeated or played randomly.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Repeat mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touching the “Repeat” key again,
the ”Repeat Track” key appears. By touching
the “Repeat” key once more, the “Repeat
Folder” key appears. . To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icons
are illuminated.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Random mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touching the “Random” key again,
the ”Random Folder” key appears. By
touching the “Random” key once more, the
“Random All” key appears. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until
no icons are illuminated.
LHA3794
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
supports charging via a USB connection, its
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located on the
instrument panel below the heater and air
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0
required for smartphone integration)
∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0
required for smartphone integration)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required for
smartphone integration)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone integration)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone integration)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
butiPod® was playing, pressing the
ton will start the iPod®.
REPEAT (RPT)
When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons
RANDOM (RDM)
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for less than
1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current
track on the iPod® will be played.
When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
iPod® will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Shuffle Off
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it
returns to the previous menu.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
LHA3794
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located on the
instrument panel below the heater and air
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
supports charging via a USB connection, its
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
LHA4007
LHA2907
Audio main operation
Interface
AUX button
The interface for iPod® operation shown on
the vehicle’s audio system display screen is
similar to the iPod® interface. Use the
BACK button or the
touch-screen,
scrolling knob to navigate the menus on
the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”
key to bring up the iPod® interface.
When the AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the
system will turn on. If another audio source
is playing and the iPod® is connected, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the iPod® mode.
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Depending on the iPod® model, the following items may be available on the menu list
screen. For additional information, refer to
the iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
menu item.
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Genres
∙ Songs
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Podcasts
∙ Update Music Library (if so equipped)
Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern
can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random
play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle
mode is active, the text is illuminated.
Touching the “Shuffle” key once more will
display the “Shuffle songs” key. To cancel
Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key again
until the text is no longer illuminated.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat
mode is active, the text is illuminated.
Touching the “Repeat” key once more will
display the “Repeat song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key again
until the text is no longer illuminated.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
When the
SEEK or
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the
iPod® will be played.
SEEK or
TRACK butWhen the
ton is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the iPod® will return
to the normal play speed.
LHA2279
Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is
possible to scroll the list by the first character in the name. To activate character indexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the
upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the number
or letter to jump to in the list and then press
the ENTER/AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after a few seconds, the display returns to normal.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
5. The system will display a PIN on the
screen and request confirmation that it
matches the one on the handset.
NOTE:
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.
LHA2775
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Select “Bluetooth”.
3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This
same screen can be accessed to remove, replace or select a different
Bluetooth® device.
4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3
button for play and the Preset 4 button for
pause.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.
LHA3711
LHA2844
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
5. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset.
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
NOTE:
∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen.
LHA0049
CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SOURCE switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, push the SOURCE switch to turn
the audio system on.
Push the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
LHA3812
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
AM → FM1 → FM2 →(XM1→XM2→XM3 (satellite, if so equipped))→(SXM1→SXM→ (satellite radio, if so equipped) →SXM2 (satellite
radio, if so equipped)→SXM3 (satellite radio,
if so equipped) → CD* → USB/iPod®*→
Bluetooth® Audio* →Audio App*→ AUX* →
AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.
switches
1. SOURCE switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3.
switches
4. Volume control switch
Use the
switches on the steering wheel to navigate to the “Audio” display
menu in the vehicle information display.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.
Menu control
switch/ENTER
button
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward
or downward to select a station, track, CD
or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
provides a different function than a tilting
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to seek up or down to the next station.
XM/SXM (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to go to the next or previous channel.
iPod®
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if
so equipped)
CD
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files).
USB
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number.
Bluetooth® Audio
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can
be removed. When you need to remove the
antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise and hand tighten.
CAUTION
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.
∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to reverse or fast forward the current
song.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone
Integration technology. This allows many
compatible Smartphone applications to
be displayed and easily controlled through
the vehicle’s touch-screen. This feature is
an option on navigation system equipped
vehicles. For additional information, refer to
the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
NISSANCONNECT® SERVICES (if so
equipped)
SIRI® EYES FREE
NissanConnect® Services is a suite of telematics tools that provide emergency preparedness, remote access, customizable
alerts and convenience services. This feature is an option on navigation system
equipped vehicles. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
TALK switch on the steering
from the
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
∙ For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Initialization” in
this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, the switch operation select
screen is displayed.
LHA4005
SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
TALK switch on the steering
pushing
wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, push and hold the
TALK switch to activate the Siri Eyes
Free function.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action
can also be changed from the
Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Changing
Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
TALK
2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the
end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to
extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TALK
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to resume playback.
NOTE:
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming
text messages.
2. After reading the message, push or
push and hold the
TALK switch to
reply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models with
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.
5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set the activation.
2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Siri” and
then press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press
the ENTER/SETTING button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Free from switch on the
steering wheel
Audio Source does not
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Play, pause, next track,
previous track or play
timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot hear map turnby-turn direction guidance from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications on the
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text
message notifications by
Siri Eyes Free
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold
TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short
the
push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TALK switch on the steering
NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The Mobile Entertainment System is
designed for rear seat passenger
viewing only.
∙ It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for
a person to drive a motor vehicle
which is equipped with a television
viewer or screen that is located in the
motor vehicle at any point forward of
the back of the driver’s seat, or that is
visible, directly or indirectly, to the
driver while operating the vehicle.
∙ In the interest of safety, the monitors
should never be installed where they
will be visible, directly or indirectly, by
the operator of the motor vehicle.
∙ If your vehicle is equipped with a wireless rear seat audio system or any
other wireless infrared device, make
sure it is powered off when operating
the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
If both systems are powered on at the
same time, the two systems may obstruct each other, possibly creating
undesirable
audio
interference
through the wireless headphones.
∙ For safety reasons, when changing
video discs it is recommended that
the vehicle is not in motion, and that
you do not allow children to unfasten
safety belts to change discs or make
any adjustments to the system. System adjustments can be accomplished using the remote control unit,
while safety belts remain fastened.
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to run the vehicle engine while
using the system. Using this system
without running the engine can result
in a battery drain. To avoid the risk of
battery drain, please remember to
turn off the system when the vehicle
is not in use. Do not touch the inner
pins of the jacks on the front panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause
permanent damage to the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the USB device, it may or
may not charge when connected to the
USB connection port. Not all devices are
able to charge when connected to the
USB connection port.
Each monitor includes a built-in dual channel infrared transmitter for use with wireless headphones. The wireless headphones must be used within a line of sight
from the transmitter as infrared transmission, like visible light, travels only in a
straight line.
When placing the headphones on your
head, make sure to observe the Left and
Right orientation. The headphones must
be oriented correctly (facing forward) in order to receive the audio signal. Press the
power button on the headphones, then select channel “A” to listen to monitor A, or
channel “B” to listen to monitor B. Adjust the
audio level using the volume control on
each headphone.
There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone output jack on each monitor which can be
used with any standard stereo headphone
with an in-line volume control (wired headphones sold separately).
The system includes a built-in infrared receiver for use with the included wireless
remote control. For additional information,
refer to “Remote control operation” in this
section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
FRONT PANEL BUTTONS
CAUTION
∙ Do not use any harsh solvents or
chemicals when cleaning the unit.
∙ Do not use any abrasive cleaners that
may scratch the screen. Use only a
lightly dampened lint free cloth to
wipe the screen if it is dirty.
∙ Position LCD monitor in the fully
closed position when not in use.
∙ Before using the monitor, ensure lever
lock and release latch is engaged in
A .
the normal viewing position 䊊
∙ Do not put pressure on the screen.
∙ Caution children to avoid touching the
screen, as it may become dirty or
damaged.
Status lights
LHA3804
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Status lights
Disc Compartment Slot
IR Sensor/Transmitter
Monitor Adjustment
TFT LCD Panel
USB Port
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Audio Video Output Jack
Headphone Output Jack
Audio Video Input Jacks
I/O Port Covers
Lever Lock and Release Latch
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The status lights illuminate if there is no
disc present in the unit.
Disc Compartment Slot
Headphone Output Jack
Insert a disc to play.
Connect wired headphones using a 3.5mm
stereo connector. Headphones must include in-line volume control in order to adjust the volume level.
IR Sensor/Transmitter
The IR sensor allows the remote control to
operate the monitor. The IR transmitter
provides audio to IR wireless headphones.
Monitor Adjustment
The monitor is hinged to allow the user to
manually adjust the viewing angle of the
A .
LCD panel 䊊
TFT LCD Panel
7–inch TFT LCD Panel.
USB Port
Play videos, music, and images stored on
most USB devices. It also allows for charging some USB devices.
Audio Video Output Jack
Audio Video Input Jacks
Connect to an external audio/video source
using RCA type connectors (sold separately).
I/O Port Covers
Gently pull down on the I/O covers to expose the ports. Keep the ports covered
when not in use.
Lever Lock & Release Latch
The lever lock and release latch located
behind the monitor limits the monitor
A ). Sliding the latch
angle (normal viewing 䊊
to the left will allow the monitor to open to
B.
the service position 䊊
Connect to an external audio/video monitor using a 3.5mm A/V connector (sold
separately).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
STOP button
Press this button to stop media playback.
PAUSE button
Press this button to pause media playback.
MENU/SELECT button
Press this button to access the DVD OSD
menu. Press the SETUP button on the remote control to exit the DVD OSD menu.
For additional information, refer to “How to
use the DVD OSD Menu” in this section.
LHA3845
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
POWER button
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons
PLAY button
STOP button
PAUSE button PLAY button
MENU/SELECT button
EJECT button
SOURCE button
FRONT PANEL BUTTONS
OPERATION
POWER buttons
Press this button to turn the monitor on or
off.
SOURCE button
Press this button to cycle between monitor
A audio/video sources and monitor B
audio/video sources.
EJECT buttons
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT buttons
Press this button to eject the disc.
These buttons are used to navigate the
contents of the display menus.
PLAY button
Press this button to play the media.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3846
WIRELESS HEADPHONE
OPERATION
Installing the batteries
Before attempting to operate the headphones, install the batteries as described
below.
A .
1. Remove headphone battery cover 䊊
2. Install two “AAA” batteries into the
headphones. Make sure the proper polarity (+ or –) is observed.
3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.
LHA3847
LHA3810
Headphone operation
NOTE:
A on the headPress the power button 䊊
phones to turn on and off the headphones.
The red LED will illuminate when the headB
phone is turned on. Set the select switch 䊊
to “A” or “B” for use with the “A” monitor or “B”
monitor respectively. Use the volume
C to adjust the volume level
thumb wheel䊊
for the headphone audio.
If the headphones are accidentally left
on and system is powered off, a battery
saver feature will automatically turn off
the headphones after approximately
3 minutes.
CAUTION
∙ Always ensure that the batteries are
inserted with the positive and negative terminals in the correct direction
as
shown
in
the
battery
compartment.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
∙ Different types of batteries have different characteristics. Do not mix different types.
1. Turn the remote control face down.
Press down on the ridged area of the
battery cover and slide it off.
∙ Remove the batteries if the headphones are not used for a month or
longer.
2. Install two “AAA” batteries. Make sure
that proper polarity (+ or —) is observed.
3. Slide the cover back into place until it
clicks.
NOTE:
The remote control will only operate this
device. It is not a universal remote control and will not control other equipment.
WARNING
LHA3848
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Before attempting to operate your remote
control, install the batteries described below.
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Keep the batteries out of the reach of
children. Should the batteries be
swallowed, immediately consult a
doctor. Also, when disposing of used
batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental
public institution rules that apply in
your country/area.
4. EJECT button
CAUTION
∙ Always ensure that the batteries are
inserted with the positive and negative terminals in the correct direction
as
shown
in
the
battery
compartment.
5. DVD-B button
∙ Different types of batteries have different characteristics. Do not mix different types.
9. RIGHT button
6. SOUND AROUND SELECT button
7. PIX button
8. REPEAT button
10. ENTER button
∙ Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries will shorten
battery life and/or cause chemical
leaks from the old batteries.
11. A-B button
∙ When batteries fail to function, replace them immediately.
14. AUDIO button
12. R-S button
13. ERASE/ADD button
15. ANGLE button
∙ Remove the batteries if the remote
control is not used for a month or
longer.
16. GO TO button
17. DISPLAY button
18. PROGRAM button
LHA4093
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS
19. RANDOM button
20. 3D button
1. POWER button
21. PBC (Video CD only) button
2. SOURCE button
22. ZOOM button
3. SETUP button
23. NEXT button
24. PREV button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
25. FF (Fast forward) button
POWER button
PIX button
26. FR (Fast rewind) button
Press this button to turn the monitor on.
Press this button again to turn the monitor
off.
Press this button to access the picture adjustment menu and select between
BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, SATURATION,
HUE, SHARPNESS, IR HEADPHONE, LANGUAGE, and RESET. Press the
or
buttons to adjust the screen.
27. STOP button
28. PLAY/PAUSE button
29. Number Keys
Source button
31. TITLE button
Press this button to cycle between monitor
A audio/video sources and monitor B
audio/video sources.
32. CH-SEARCH/SKIP button
Setup button
30. SUBTITLE button
33. AUTO MEMORY button
34. DOWN button
35. RETURN button
36. LEFT button
37. UP button
38. MENU button
39. MUTE button
REPEAT button
Press this button to select between different repeat modes.
Press this button to navigate the DVD OSD
menu. For additional information, refer to
“How to use the DVD OSD menu” in this
section.
ENTER button
Eject button
RIGHT button
Press this button to eject the disc.
Press this button to navigate right when
displaying a menu or file list.
DVD–B button
Press this button to make a selection or
begin playback of the media.
A-B button
41. DVD-A button
Press this button to transmit the remote
control codes and functions to operate
monitor B.
NOTE:
SOUND AROUND SELECT button
Press the A-B button once to set point A
and then press again to set point B. Playback will now repeat between point A and
point B.
The following remote control functions
do not apply to this model: A-B and Program.
Selects a FM transmitter channel.
R-S button
40. SOUND AROUND ON/OFF button
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Non-functioning.
ERASE / ADD button
RANDOM button
FF (Fast forward) button
Non-functioning.
Press this button to play content in a random order.
Press this button to search media forwards.
3D button
FR (Fast rewind) button
Press this button to select between several
audio effects. DVD mode: Concert, Living
Room, Hall, Bathroom, Cave, Arena, Church,
and Off.
Press this button to search media backwards.
PBC (Video CD only) button
Press this button to run the playback control on or off.
Press this button once to stop playback
(press play to resume playback). Press this
button twice to perform a full stop (press
play to start playback from the beginning).
GO TO button
ZOOM button
PLAY/PAUSE button
Non-functioning.
Press this button to zoom in or out when
displaying images or playing DVDs. The
zoom range for images is from 50% to
200%. The zoom range for DVDs is from 1/4
size to 4x the original size.
Press this button to begin media playback.
Press this button again to pause media
playback.
NEXT button
0—9
AUDIO button
Press this button to select and listen to
different audio streams (this function only
applies to DVD titles that support multiple
audio streams).
ANGLE button
Press this button to select different viewing
angles (this function only applies to DVD
titles that support multiple angles).
DISPLAY button
Press this button to display various information including title, chapter/track,
elapsed time, time remaining, or turn off
the display.
PROGRAM button
Edit a playback program containing desired titles in the DVD or tracks in the CDDA.
Press this button to select the next chapter,
track, or file.
PREV button
STOP button
Number Keys
SUBTITLE button
Press this button to select and display subtitles (this function only applies to DVD titles
that support subtitles).
Press this button to select the previous
chapter, track, or file.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
TITLE button
MENU button
Press this button to navigate the title menu
if included on the disc.
Press this button to go to the root menu if
included on the disc.
CH- SEARCH/SKIP button
MUTE button
Non-functioning.
Non-functioning.
Press this button to mute the audio when
playing discs or playing files from a USB
device. Press this button again to resume
audio.
DOWN button
SOUND AROUND ON/OFF
Press this button to navigate down when
displaying a menu or file list.
Turns the FM transmitter ON/OFF.
AUTO MEMORY button
RETURN button
Press this button to return to a previous
menu screen.
LEFT button
Press this button to navigate left when displaying a menu or file list.
UP button
Press this button to navigate up when displaying a menu or file list.
DVD–A button
Press this button to transmit the remote
control codes and functions to operate
monitor A.
GENERAL OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
Turning the monitor ON or OFF
1. Press the POWER button on the front
panel or the remote control to turn the
monitor on or off. When powered on,
the front panel controls will illuminate.
2. After the monitor has been turned on
and is displaying a picture, adjust the
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
viewing angle by pivoting the screen to
optimize the picture quality.
3. Remember to turn the monitor off and
return the LCD monitor to the fully
closed (upright) position when not in
use.
Listening through vehicle
speakers
Press the AUX button on the factory radio
and toggle through AUX screens to select
VTRF — Jack to listen to the audio from
monitor A.
Sharing sources between Monitor
A and Monitor B
The source button on your monitor unit or
remote control allows viewing monitor A
video on monitor B and vice versa. Press
the source button to cycle through available video sources.
Disc/DVD Basic Operation
To get the most use out of each disc, make
sure you read this section completely.
For additional information, refer to “CD care
and cleaning” in this section.
Regional coding
Both the DVD player and discs are coded by
region. These regional codes must match
in order for the disc to play. The system is
preset to the region code designated for
your area by the DVD Copy Control Association. Other regions may not be played in
this system.
Supported Disc Types
∙ DVD-Video: DVD contains video
∙ DVD +/- R: DVD contains video
∙ CD-DA: CD contains audio
∙ CD-Video: CD contains video
∙ CD-R/+RW: CD contains audio
the disc compartment slot, with the disc’s
label facing the rear of the vehicle. Do NOT
insert the disc at an angle. The Disc must
be inserted straight into the player.
The disc will load automatically and begin
to play. Some discs may start at the root
menu, where playback must be selected to
start a movie. Depending on the disc and
playback location on the disc, a “ ” icon
may be displayed in the upper left-hand
corner of the screen indicating that playback is not possible during certain times.
Additional information on Media
Compatibility
This system is compatible with the following media formats:
Unsupported Disc Types
Before you load a disc, make sure that it is
compatible with the player. Note that the
following disc CANNOT be used with this
system: Optical disc- CD-1, CD-ROM, and
DVD-ROM Mini disc- CDG (audio only, not
graphics), and Blu-ray (list is not all inclusive).
Loading and Playing Discs
Press the POWER button to turn the monitor on. Insert the disc about halfway into
Format
Audio
Video
Image
Extension
MP3
.mp3
WMA
.wma
AVI
.avi
MPEG-1
.mpg
MPEG-2
.mpg
JPEG
.jpg
∙ The text information of some audio and
video files may not be correctly displayed.
∙ There may be a slight delay before playback of files using a USB flash drive with
complex folder hierarchies.
∙ Some audio, video, and image files may
be incompatible with this system due
to file characteristics, file format, recording software used, directory structure,
and/or the type of audio/video encoding used.
HOW TO USE THE DVD OSD MENU
This section describes how to set and adjust settings using On-Screen Display
(OSD) Menu. You can use the OSD menu to
adjust all the settings. Follow the steps outlined below to select the desired function.
Due to ongoing technological advancements, some USB flash drives may be incompatible with this system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
LHA3851
LHA3852
LHA3853
General Setup Page
OSD Language
Angle Mark
Press the SETUP button on the remote
or
and
control. Use the
or
buttons to navithe
gate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to select
to return to the suband then
–menu. To cancel the Setup Display, press
the SETUP button on the remote.
The OSD Lang sub-menu allows the user to
select the language for the on-screen display. When the OSD Lang option is highbutton once
lighted, press the
or
butand then use the
tons on the remote control to select the
desired language. The user can select English, Simplified/Traditional Chinese, French,
German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, or
Korean for the OSD language. Press ENTER
button to
to select and then the
return to the sub-menu.
The angle mark is an option for different
viewing angles on the DVD. When the Angle
Mark option is highlighted, press
button once and then use
the
or
buttons on the rethe
mote control to turn the angle mark setting on or off. Press ENTER to select and
button to return to the
then the
sub-menu.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3854
LHA3855
Speaker Setup Page
Video Setup Page
Downmix— When the Downmix option is
highlighted, press the
button
once
and
then
use
the
or
buttons on the remote control
to select between Stereo or LT/RT. Press
butENTER to select and then the
ton to return to the sub-menu.
Video Quality — When the Quality option is
highlighted, press ENTER and then use
or
and the
the
or
buttons on the remote control
to select between the various video quality
settings. Press ENTER to select and then
button to return to the subthe
menu.
LHA3856
Video Quality Setup
Option
Description
Range
Default
Sharpness
Adjust to
soften or
sharpen the
picture.
Low/
Med/
High
Low
Brightness
Adjust to
brighten or
darken the
picture.
-20 —
+20
00
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Option
Description
Range
Default
Contrast
Adjust to increase or decrease picture contrast.
-16 —
+16
00
Gamma
Adjust to increase or decrease the
picture
gamma.
Low/
Med/
High/
None
None
Hue
Adjust to increase or decrease the
color hue.
-09 —
+09
00
Saturation
Adjust to increase or decrease color
intensity.
-09 —
+09
Luma Delay
Adjust to
change the
Luma delay.
0T or 1T
00
1T
LHA3857
LHA3858
Preference Page
Audio
If a disc or USB device is playing, press STOP
twice (full stop). Press the SETUP button on
the remote control. Use the
The Audio sub-menu allows the user to
select the audio stream in the desired language for playback. When the Audio option
button
is highlighted, press the
once
and
then
use
the
or
buttons on the remote control
to select the desired language. The user
can select English, French, Spanish, Chinese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Korean, Russian or Thai for the audio
stream language. Press ENTER to select
button to return to
and then the
the sub-menu. The DVD title must include
or
and the
or
buttons on the remote control to navigate
the Setup Page. Press ENTER to select and
to return to the subthen the
menu.
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
the desired audio stream in order for it to
be heard during playback.
the desired audio stream in order for it to
be heard during playback.
LHA3859
Subtitle
The Subtitle sub-menu allows the user to
select the subtitle in the desired language
for playback. When the Subtitle option is
button
highlighted, press the
once
and
then
use
the
or
buttons on the remote control
to select the desired language. The user
can select English, French, Spanish, Chinese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Thai or OFF for the
subtitle language. Press ENTER to select
button to return to
and then the
the sub-menu. The DVD title must include
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
desired menu language in order for it to be
displayed during playback.
LHA3860
LHA3861
Disc Menu
Default
The Disc Menu sub-menu allows the user
to select the desired language of the DVD
disc menu. When the Disc Menu option is
button
highlighted, press the
once
and
then
use
the
or
buttons on the remote control
to select the desired language. The user
can select English, French, Spanish, Chinese, Japanese, German, Portuguese, Italian, Korean, Russian or Thai for the Disc
Menu language. Press ENTER to select and
button to return to the
then the
sub-menu. The DVD title must include the
This section of the Setup Menu allows the
user to restore all controls and values to
the default levels. When the Default option
button
is highlighted, press the
once and then press ENTER to perform the
reset. This will not affect parental control
setting.
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
settings. Using the remote control, enter
the password (0000) and press ENTER to
confirm the setting and return to the submenu.
LHA3862
Parental
This section of the Setup Menu allows the
user to select the level of movie content
playback from KID SAFE to ADULT. The parental control function allows you to limit
viewing to your preference. The rating levels range from 1 to 8 and are country dependent. The lower rating number, the
stricter the playback limitation is. When the
Parental option is highlighted, press
button once and then use
the
or
buttons on the rethe
mote control to select the desired parental
control setting and press ENTER. A password is required to change the Parental
LHA3863
HOW TO USE THE MONITOR OSD
MENU
This section describes how to set and adjust the following monitor settings using
the monitor on-screen display (OSD) Menu:
∙ Press the PIX button on the remote control to select between the options in the
table below.
∙ After selecting the desired option, use
or
buttons on the
the
remote control to adjust the setting.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Option
Description
Brightness
Adjust to
brighten
or darken
the
picture.
Contrast
Saturation
Hue
Range
0 — 100
Adjust to
increase
or decrease
picture
contrast.
0 — 100
Adjust to
increase
or decrease
color
intensity.
0 — 100
Adjust to
increase
or decrease
the color
hue.
0 — 100
Default
50
50
50
Option
Description
Sharpness
Adjust to
soften or
sharpen
the
picture.
0 — 100
Select on
or off to
turn the
IR headphone
audio
output
on or off.
ON or
OFF
ON
English,
French,
Spanish,
Portuguese
English
IR Headphone
Set language of
the
Language
monitor
OSD
menu.
Range
Default
Option
50
Reset
50
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Description
Range
Resets
the
Press Up
monitor
or Down;
OSD
“OK” will
menu
be
settings
displayed.
to default
values.
Default
Display
Press the DISPLAY button on the remote
control to select the desired type of display
setting. The single elapsed time of the current track is displayed by default.
Press DISPLAY (1x)
“Single Remain” is displayed along with the
current track playing and the amount of
time remaining for the current track.
LHA3864
PLAYING A CD
ning of the current track. Press the PREV
button two times to select the previous
track.
Repeat Modes
To access the repeat mode options, press
the REPEAT button on the remote control.
The repeat mode options are as follows:
∙
REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire
disc (default).
REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current
Press DISPLAY (2x)
∙
“Total Elapsed” is displayed along with the
current track playing and the total amount
of elapsed time.
∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the
disc in its entirety.
Insert a disc into the unit with label facing
the rear of vehicle and select monitor A
mode (if using monitor A) or monitor B
mode (if using monitor B) using the front
controls or the remote control.
Press DISPLAY (3x)
When playing an audio CD, the information
screen appears automatically. It can display the current track number along with
the amount of time the track has been
playing, the amount of time remaining for
the track playing, the total amount of time
elapsed so far, or the total amount of time
remaining.
Press the DISPLAY button again to display
the elapsed time of the current track.
“Total Remain” is displayed along with the
current track playing and the total amount
of time remaining.
Skipping Tracks
Press the NEXT button on the remote control to select to the next track. Press the
PREV button one time to select the begin-
track.
Random Mode
You can choose what order the tracks will
be played. To access the random play
mode, press the RANDOM button on the
remote control. All tracks on the disc will
playback in random order. Press RANDOM
again to cancel random mode.
Direct Track Access
Press the number keys on the remote control (0–9) to access a track directly. For example, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then
ENTER on the remote control.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
Using a USB Device
Insert a USB device into the USB connection port. When inserting a USB device, the
top side of the devices should face upwards.
When an MP3/WMA encoded disc or USB
device is inserted, the information screen
appears automatically and playback will
begin.
Display
LHA3865
PLAYING AUDIO FILES
MP3 and WMA are formats for storing digital audio. A CD quality song can be compressed into the MP3 or WMA format with
very little loss of quality, while talking up
much less storage space. Encoded discs
and USB devices that include MP3 or WMA
audio files can be played on this system.
Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and
select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)
or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the
front panel controls or the remote control.
During audio file playback, press the DISPLAY button on the remote control to select between the file list and currently playing file.
Selecting Files
1. To change files when a file is playing,
press the
or
buttons
on the remote control to display the file
list, and then press the
or
buttons to select the desired file.
2. Once the desired file is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Selecting Folders
1. To select folders when a file is playing,
button on the repress the
mote control to display the list. Press
or
the
lect the desired folder.
buttons to se-
button to access
2. Press the
the previous level (go up one level) or,
button to access
press the
the next level (go down one level).
3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
Skipping Files
Press the NEXT button on the remote control to select to the next file. Press the PREV
button one time to select the beginning of
the current file. Press the PREV button two
times to select the previous file.
Repeat Modes
To access the repeat mode options, press
the REPEAT button on the remote control.
The repeat mode options are as follows:
∙
REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire
disc or USB device (default).
∙
mixed audio/video/image files is inserted,
the file list screen may appear first.
REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the current folder
Selecting Files
REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current
∙
file.
1. To select files during the slideshow,
press the MENU button remote control
to access the file list. Press the
or
buttons on the remote control to select the desired file.
∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the
disc or USB device is played in its entirety.
Random Mode
You can choose what order the files will be
played. To access the random play mode,
press the RANDOM button on the remote
control. The files in the current folder will
playback in random order. Press RANDOM
again to cancel random mode.
Direct File Access
Press the number keys on the remote control (0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then
ENTER on the remote control.
2. Once the desired file is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
LHA3866
PLAYING IMAGE FILES
Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and
select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)
or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the
front panel controls or the remote control.
Using a USB Device
Insert a USB device into the USB connection port. When inserting a USB device, the
top side of the devices should face upwards.
Selecting Folders
1. To select folders during the slideshow,
press the MENU button on the remote
control to access the list.
button to access
2. Press the
the previous level (go up one level) or,
button to access
press the
the next level (go down one level).
3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
When a disc or USB device with JPG files is
inserted, the slideshow will begin automatically. When a disc or USB device with
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Repeat Modes
Rotating Images
To access the repeat mode options, press
the REPEAT button on the remote control.
The repeat mode options are as follows:
During the slideshow, press the
button on the remote control to rotate the
image 90° clockwise. Press the
button to rotate the image 90° counterclockwise.
∙
REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire
disc or USB device (default).
∙
REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the current folder
REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current
∙
file.
During the slideshow, press the
button on the remote control to invert the
image (Up-Down).
Mirroring Images
∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the
disc or USB device is played in its entirety.
Thumbnail Views
During
the
slideshow,
press
the
button on the remote control
to mirror the image (Left-Right).
Direct File Access
1. Press the STOP button on the remote
control during the slideshow to display
images in thumbnail mode. Press
the
Inverting Images
or
Press the number keys on the remote control (0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then
ENTER on the remote control.
and
LHA3867
PLAYING VIDEO FILES
Insert a disc or USB device into the unit and
select monitor A mode (if using monitor A)
or monitor B (if using monitor B) using the
front panel controls or the remote control.
Using a USB Device
the
or
buttons on the
remote control to select the desired
language.
Insert a USB device into the USB connection port. When inserting a USB device, the
top side of the device should face upwards.
2. Once the desired image is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
When a disc or USB device with video files is
inserted, playback will begin automatically.
When a disc or USB device with mixed
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
audio/video/image files is inserted, the file
list screen may appear first.
Selecting Files
1. To select files during the video playback, press the MENU button on the
remote control to access the file list.
or
buttons
Press the
on the remote control to select the desired file.
2. Once the desired file is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
Selecting Folders
1. To select folders during video playback,
press the MENU button on the remote
control to access the list.
button to access
2. Press the
the previous level (go up one level) or,
button to access
press the
the next level (go down one level).
3. Once the desired folder is highlighted,
press the ENTER button on the remote
control to select it.
Skipping Files
CHARGING A USB DEVICE
Press the NEXT button on the remote control to select to the next file. Press the PREV
button one time to select the beginning of
the current file. Press the PREV button two
times to select the previous file.
Plug the USB cable (not supplied) into the
USB connection port and then connect the
other end to the USB device.
Repeat Modes
Depending on the device, it may or may
not charge when connected to the USB
port. Not all devices are able to charge
when connected to the USB port.
To access the repeat mode options, press
the REPEAT button on the remote control.
The repeat mode options are as follows:
∙
REPEAT ALL: Repeat the entire
disc or USB device (default).
∙
REPEAT FOLDER: Repeat the current folder
REPEAT ONE: Repeat the current
∙
file.
∙ REPEAT OFF: Playback stops after the
disc or USB device is played in its entirety.
Direct File Access
Press the number keys on the remote control (0–9) to access a file directly. For example, to go to track 14, press “1”,”4”, then
ENTER on the remote control.
NOTE:
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL
AUXILIARY A/V SOURCE — INPUT
An external A/V source such as a media
player, video game, or other audio/video
device may be connected to the RCA type
jacks on the front of the monitor. Connect
the external audio/video source to the RCA
type input jacks on the front of the monitor
using RCA type connectors (sold separately).
Yellow: Video input
Red: Audio-right channel input
White: Audio-left channel input
The system will automatically select the
auxiliary input mode when the RCA type
connectors are inserted into the input
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
jacks. The auxiliary input connection overrides disc and USB playback.
The system provides priority for each of the
following device inputs:
1. External RCA A/V input
2. USB port
3. Disc playback
For example if a disc is playing and a USB
device is plugged in, the USB device will
take priority over disc playback. The external RCA A/V input connections have priority over both USB port and disc playback.
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL A/V
MONITOR — OUTPUT
An external audio/video monitor may be
connected to the 3.5mm A/V connector
(sold separately).
SELECTING MONITOR A OR B AS
THE SOURCE
It is possible to select monitor B as the
source from monitor A and vice versa. This
will allow content that is playing on monitor
B to be displayed on monitor A.
Monitor A:
To select monitor B as the source for monitor A, press the source button on the front
panel or the remote control until “MONITOR
B” is displayed.
Remote control does not
function.
Disc will not
play.
Monitor B:
To select monitor A as the source for monitor B, press the source button on the front
panel or the remote control until “MONITOR
A” is displayed.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
NOTE:
Use the 3.5mm A/V cable made specifically for the device. An optional adapter
(sold separately) may be used to convert
the 3.5mm A/V output to the standard
RCA jacks.
Symptom
Monitor does
not power on.
Remedy
Is ignition switch turned to the
ON or ACC position?
Are batteries installed in the remote control?
Check the remote control to
make sure “DVD-A” button is
pressed for controlling monitor
A and “DVD-B” button is pressed
for controlling monitor B.
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Disc plays, but
stops
intermittently.
No picture.
Distorted
picture.
Remedy
Verify that the batteries in the
remote control are good.
Verify that the remote sensor
lens is not obstructed.
Insert the disc with label side
facing the rear of the vehicle.
Check if the disc is defective by
trying another disc.
Check the type of disc being
played. This unit only plays DVD
(Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R,
DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW,
CD, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Both the unit and DVD discs are
coded by region. If the region
codes don’t match, the DVD
can’t be played.
The disc is dirty and needs
cleaning.
Condensation has formed inside the unit. Remove the disc
and allow unit to dry out.
Check the signal source is
connected.
Check the menu source setting.
Match your monitor mode with
the source correctly.
Check the disc for fingerprints
and clean with a soft cloths,
wiping from center to edge.
Symptom
Remedy
You cannot advance through
the opening credits and warnCannot ading information that appears at
vance through
the beginning of DVDs because
a DVD movie.
the disc is programmed to prohibit these actions.
Make sure that the external media device is connected
properly, and all cables are securely inserted into the appropriate jacks.
Verify that the batteries in the
headphones are good.
If you are using the wireless
headphones, make sure you
turn on the power and select
No sound or
the correct monitor (A or B).
distorted
Is volume turned on the headsound.
phones?
Is anything blocking the path
between the monitor IR sensor
and headphones?
When placing the headphones
on your head, make sure to observe the Left and Right
orientation. The headphones
must be oriented correctly (facing forward) in order to receive
the audio signal.
Symptom
Monitor feels
warm.
Remedy
When the monitor is in use for a
long period of time, the surface
will be warm. This is normal.
Some operations are not permitted by the DVD.
For additional information, refer
to the specific instructions included with the DVD.
Player does
not respond
to all commands during
playback.
When a DVD is
inserted, a Parental Setting
Using the remote control, enter
message is
the 4–digit Parental Password
displayed, pro(0000) and then press Enter.
hibiting DVD
movie
playback.
If the incorrect Parental PassAfter the Paword is entered more than two
rental Passtimes, the until will stop playword is
back and return to the
entered, a
splashscreen. Using the remote
Password Incontrol, press Play to initiate
correct mesplayback and display the Parensage is distal Setting message. Using the
played and
remote control, enter the 4–digit
DVD movie will
Parental Password (0000) and
not play.
then press Enter.
SPECIFICATIONS
LCD Backlight
Resolution
Display
DVD Mechanism
Supported Disc
Sources
I/O Ports
Frequency Response
LED
480x3(RGB) x234
7”TFT LCD Panel
Slot-In Loader
DVD (Single, Dual Layer),
DVD-R/+R, DVD-R/+R Dual
layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,
CD-R, CD-RW
Internal CD/DVD, USB Flash
Memory, External A/V Input
USB 2.0 port, 3.5mm A/V
Output Jack, 3.5mm Headphone Jack, RCA Type A/V
Input Jacks
20Hz — 20kHz
Output Level: 2Vpp (input
Headphone (Audio
0dB 1kHz)
Out)
Load Impedance: 10kΩ
Video Display Sys- NTSC/PAL
tem
Output Level: 1Vpp (±20%)
Video Out
Load Impedance: 75Ω
Dual channel infrared audio
Wireless Audio
transmitter, supports stereo
headphone operation
Channels
IR Channels
A :2.3/2.8 MHz
B: 3.2/3.8 MHz
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
FCC NOTICE
This device has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this device
does cause unacceptable interference to
radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
∙ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
∙ Increase the separation between the
device and receiver.
∙ Connect the device into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
∙ Consult your dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING
WARNING
∙ To assure continued FCC compliance,
the user must use the provided
grounded power supply cord and the
shielded video interface cable with
bonded ferrite cores.
∙ Any unauthorized change or modifications to this device would void the
user’s authority to operate this
device.
ITE NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This device and its antenna(s) must not be
co-located or operation in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an
antenna or a type and maximum (or lesser)
gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type
and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power
(e.i.r.p) is not more than that necessary for
successful communication.
which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this device.
The recycling of material will help to conserve natural resources. For additional information about recycling of this device,
please contact your local city office, your
household waste disposal service or the
shop where you purchased the device. Applicable accessory: remote control.
MACROVISION NOTICE
LHA3869
WEEE NOTICE
Disposal of Old Electrical & Electronic
Equipment (Applicable in the European
Union and other European countries with
separate collection systems).
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that the device shall not be
treated as household waste. Instead, it
shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical
and electronic equipment By ensuring this
device is disposed of correctly, you will help
prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health,
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing used only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
LHA3870
DOLBY DIGITAL
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
in-vehicle phone module when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position with the
previously connected cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
LHA3780
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
∙ Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone
connecting procedure is required. Your
phone is automatically connected with the
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone
system seems to be malfunctioning.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Keep all vents pointed away
from the microphone and close the
windows to eliminate surrounding
noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,
etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
∙ For calling contacts by name, please
say both the first and last name of the
contact for better recognition.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located
press and release the
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
button on the steerand hold the
ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition session is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
You can also use the
button to interrupt the system feedback and give a
command at once. For additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a call” in this section.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
button and after
example, press the
the tone say, “Call Redial”.
LHA3781
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a Voice Recognition session or answer an incoming
call.
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition
system is active, press and
button for
hold the
5 seconds to quit the voice
recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manually control the phone system.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
LHA2775
Menu Item
Bluetooth
On
Off
Add Phone or Device
Replace Phone
2. Use
the
TUNE/SCROLL
or
TUNE/FOLDER
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on
Turns Bluetooth® functionality off
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded
using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also
visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on
connecting recommended cellular phones.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
button to bring up the
Press the
phone command menu. The available options are:
∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging
∙ Select Phone or Device
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones, text messages can
only be sent through Siri®
“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under “Phonebook”:
∙ (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice command provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry.
∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to
dial the number of the current name or
“Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook entry.
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Transfer Entry (if so equipped)
This command can be used to transfer
multiple contacts at a time. To enable
manual contact transfer capability, set
“Phonebook Download” to “Off” in the
Setting menu. The ability to transfer
contacts via the OPP Bluetooth® profile
depends on your mobile phone. For additional information, refer to your
phone’s Owner’s Manual.
∙ Delete Entry (if so equipped)
Speak this command to delete an entry
in the phonebook. Choose an entry to
delete by speaking the desired name or
say “List Names”.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.
∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number. Say “Next
Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Messaging”
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.
“Select Phone or Device”
Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
1. Press the
button.
2. The system will prompt you for a command. Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands to continue:
∙ “(a name)” – Speak the name of a
phonebook entry to place a call to that
entry. The system will respond with the
name it interpreted from your command and will prompt you to confirm
that the name is correct. Say “Dial” to
initiate the call or “Correction” to hear
another name from the phonebook.
∙ “Number” – Speak this command to
place a call by inputting numbers.
For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers,
speak the numbers. When finished, say
“Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction”
at any time in the process to correct a
misspoken or misinterpreted number.
For phone numbers with more digits or
special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered. Available special
characters are “star”, “pound”, “plus” and
“pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time
in the process to correct a misspoken
or misinterpreted number or character.
∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Redialing
<name/number>”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it
available, otherwise the number being
redialed will be displayed.
∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to
dial the number of the last incoming
call. The system will display “Calling
back <name/number>”. The name of
the phonebook entry will be displayed if
it available, otherwise the number being called back will be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is
displayed on either the vehicle information
display (if so equipped) or both the vehicle
information display (if so equipped) and the
control panel display.
Press the
Press the
button to accept the call.
button to reject the call.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button
to access additional options. Speak one of
the following commands:
∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed
by the digits to enter digits during the
phone call.
∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the
command to mute or unmute the system.
∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
button and
System, press the
confirm when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press
button to hold the active call and
the
switch to the second call. Press the
button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
the
button will allow the same commands that are available during any call as
well as two additional commands:
∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.
∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
button to accept the call.
Press the
Press the
button to reject the call.
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
ton.
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
but-
TEXT MESSAGING
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”
Check local regulations before using
the feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. Please consult you phone’s
Owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text messaging features. For additional information,
refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s
Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Send Text”.
4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ (A name)
∙ Number
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ Missed Calls
If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or
“Missed Calls” is selected, the following
additional commands will be displayed:
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Five predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Message”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information
on setting and managing custom text
messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in
this section.
∙ Send Text
∙ Next Entry
∙ Previous Entry
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Read Text”.
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on the steering wheel to scroll
through all text messages if more than one
button to exit
are available. Press the
the text message screen. Press the
button to access the following options for
replying to the text message:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to Siri® Eyes
Free in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
LHA2894
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
NOTE:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
For Apple iPhones, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.
2. Use
the
TUNE/SCROLL
or
TUNE/FOLDER
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.
∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone.
∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
∙ Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
call information displayed only in the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped). Select “Both” to have incoming call information displayed in both
the vehicle information display (if so
equipped) and the center display
screen.
∙ Siri®
button operation for
Press the
Siri® Eyes Free function from “Short
Press” and “Long Press” For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in
this section. “Siri” is displayed only when
a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone® is connected to the vehicle.
∙ Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
∙ New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
∙ Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
text messages displayed only in the vehicle information display (if so
equipped). Select “Both” to have incoming text messages displayed in both the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped) and the center display
screen. Select “None” to have no display
of incoming text messages.
∙ Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard options when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.
∙ Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131
∙ Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or customized.
Symptom
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. To activate
butmanual control mode, press the
ton on the steering wheel to access the
phone menu and then push either up or
tuning switch .
down on the
The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook
or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice
Recognition, exit the manual control mode
button.
by pressing and holding the
button will
At that time, pressing the
start the Hands Free Phone System.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this
section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be
confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Voice Commands”
in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
LHA3782
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically reconnected
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is possible.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone owner’s manual regarding the battery, battery charging and
cellular phone operations.
∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time.
∙ The signal strength display on the
monitor will not coincide with the signal
strength display of some cellular
phones.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone
system seems to be malfunctioning.
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Bosch.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
button and after
example, press the
the tone say, “Call Redial”.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the Voice Recognition system,
the system voice can be interrupted to allow the user to speak commands. While
the system is speaking, press the
button on the steering wheel. The system
voice will stop and a tone will be heard.
After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135
5. Initiate the connecting process from
the handset. The system will display
the message: “Confirm on your
Bluetooth device that the pin XXXXXX is
displayed”. If the PIN is displayed on
your
Bluetooth®
device,
select
“Yes/Pair” to complete the pairing process.
For additional information, refer to the
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
LHA3712
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Press the
panel.
NOTE:
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list.
1. Press the [
panel.
] button on the control
button on the control
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch
the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of
the screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob
to choose a letter or number and then
press ENTER/AUDIO. The list will move to
the first entry that begins with that number or letter.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel. The “Phone” screen will appear
on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to
make a call:
∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an
entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the
incoming, outgoing or missed.
∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from
the vehicle.
”: Input the phone number manu∙ “
ally using a keypad displayed on the
screen. For additional information, refer
to “How to use the touch-screen” in this
section.
RECEIVING A CALL
ENDING A CALL
NOTE:
When a call is placed to the connected
phone, the display will change to phone
mode.
To end a phone call, select the phone
icon on the screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.
To accept the incoming call, either:
TEXT MESSAGING
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
∙ Press the
wheel, or
button on the steering
icon on the screen.
∙ Touch the
To reject the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
wheel, or
button on the steering
∙ Touch the
icon on the screen.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options
are available on the screen:
∙ “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of
the phone call over to the handset.
∙ “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone. Select again to unmute the microphone.
icon
∙ Phone
Select to end the phone call.
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text
message integration requires that the
phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text
messages. Some phones may not support
all text messaging features. For additional
information, refer to www.nissanusa.com/
bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for
compatibility information, as well as your
device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
wheel.
button on the steering
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ To (a name)
∙ “Running late”
∙ Enter Number
∙ “Okay”
∙ Missed Calls
∙ “Yes”
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ “No”
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ “Where are you?”
For additional information, refer to
“Voice commands” in this section.
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For additional
information,
refer
to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.
button on the steering
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to scroll through all text messages if more than one are available. Press
button to exit the text message
the
screen. Press the
button to access
the following options for replying to the text
message:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
iPhones® can only send text messages
via Siri® Eyes Free.
Making custom messages with Siri® Eyes
Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom messages. For additional information, refer to
“Siri® Eyes Free” in this section.
Menu Item
Phone Settings
Connect New Device
Select Connected Device
Replace Connected Device
Delete Connected Device
Bluetooth
LHA2844
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
Result
For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust the following settings as desired:
∙ Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set how Siri® is operated on the steering
wheel.
∙ Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
∙ Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s
phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the
phonebook on the SIM card. Select
“Both” to use both sources.
∙ Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to
the vehicle from the chosen source.
∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to
be sent when “Auto Reply” function is
activated.
∙ Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications shown in the vehicle information
display (if so equipped). Select “Both” to
have phone notifications shown in both
the vehicle information display (if so
equipped) and the center display
screen.
∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of
the vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
∙ Text Messaging:
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.
∙ Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifications shown in the vehicle information display (if so equipped). Touch
“Both” to have text notifications shown
in both the vehicle information display
(if so equipped) and the center display
screen. Touch “Off” to turn off all text
notifications.
∙ Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality on or off.
4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom
message to edit. There are 4 customer
message slots available.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition” in
this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the systems
equipped on this vehicle, such as the
phone and navigation systems.
4. Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted.
∙ If the command is not recognized, the
system announces: “Command not
recognized”. Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located on the
press the
steering wheel. When prompted, speak the
command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by
the microphone and performed when it is
properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice
button is pressed
commands. If the
before the initialization completes, the system will announce: “Voice Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”
∙ If you want to cancel the command or
go back to the previous menu of combutton. The sysmands, press the
tem will announce: “Canceling Voice
Recognition” or “Go back” depending on
the current menu level.
LHA3783
Giving voice commands
1. Press the
button.
2. The system announces: “Please say a
category like phone or a command like
points of interest followed by a brand
name”. A list of available commands is
then spoken by the system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon
on the display changes, speak a command. Available commands are discussed in this section.
button to move back
∙ Press the
through the menus displayed on the
screen.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, use the volume control
switches on the steering wheel or the
volume knob on the control panel.
∙ The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Operating tips
How to say numbers
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be
used for “0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the
following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say
dial number and then speak the phone
number in any of the following formats:
∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
LHA4373
SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the
following systems:
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
∙ Navigation
∙ Audio
∙ Information
∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two
oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single
digits. Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For example, you cannot say
555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.
∙ My Apps
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System voice commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say “Phone” to access various
phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.
Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and
the vehicle is stationary, the system announces: “There is no phone connected.
Would you like to connect a phone now?”
Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is
set to “On”, the following voice commands
are available:
∙ Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in
which you are trying to call. System will
confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to
initiate dialing.
∙ Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.
After the number is entered, say “Dial”
to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to
correct the number entered. Say “Go
Back” to return to the main menu.
∙ List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call the number of
the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”
to send a text message to the number
of the phonebook entry. Say “Next Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, where
the same options will then be available.
4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional
command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display
a list of such calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say “Next Page” to view entries
on the next page (if available).
∙ Redial
Redials the last called number.
∙ Read Text
Reads an incoming text message. For
additional
information, refer
to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this
section.
∙ Send Text
Sends a text message. For additional
information, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
∙ Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual
controls to continue”. Use manual controls to change the active phone from
among the listed phones connected
to the vehicle.
∙ Siri®
The system replies “Starting Siri”. For
additional information, refer to “Operating Siri Eyes Free” in this section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for the Navigation System:
∙ Street Address (address)
∙ Points of Interest (name)
∙ POI by Category
∙ Home
∙ Enter Address in Steps
∙ Cancel Route
For additional information about these
commands,
see
the
separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following
available commands:
∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
∙ Tune AM (number)
∙ SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
∙ CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
∙ Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
∙ Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
∙ Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to
be played
For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in this section.
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
AM frequency
∙ Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
FM frequency
∙ Address Book
∙ Previous Destinations
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-145
INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
HELP VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the
navigation system:
The following voice commands can be
spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ Traffic
∙ Fuel Prices
∙ Stocks
∙ Movie Listings
∙ Current Weather
∙ Weather Map
∙ 5 — day Forecast
∙ List Commands
∙ What Can I Say?
∙ General Help
∙ Go Back
∙ Quit
∙ Exit
∙ 6 — hour Forecast
∙ Connect to Voice Menu
∙ Additional Commands
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this
voice command. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owners Manual.
4-146 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions
given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
The system responds “Command
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”
Not Recognized” or the system fails
menu.
to recognize the command
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
correctly.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-147
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Starting the engine (gasoline engine only) . . . . . . 5-15
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16
Starting the engine (diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Engine protection mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-23
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-26
BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-33
RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Using 4–wheel drive (4WD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-45
Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Hill Descent Control System (if so equipped) . . . . 5-62
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . 5-64
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
How to enable/disable the Sonar
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-71
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
5-2 Starting and driving
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST (if so
equipped)
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.
WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away
from
the
exhaust
system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
Starting and driving 5-3
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After your tires are
inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure
Low – Add Air” warning turns off when
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute.
Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS
system reset as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Starting and driving 5-5
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
WARNING
After rotating the tires, do not use the
Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire
pressure. Instead use a gauge to adjust
the tires to the correct pressure in accordance with Tire and Loading Information label.
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
5-6 Starting and driving
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators
flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem
on the tire briefly to release pressure.
When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps
once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the EasyFill Tire Alert under the following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tires
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However,
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
safety precautions” in this section.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
Starting and driving 5-7
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
5-8 Starting and driving
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if
you are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are
less capable than 4-wheel drive models for
rough road driving and extrication when
stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.
∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may
stall. If you drive down them, you may
not be able to control your speed. If
you drive across them, you may roll
over.
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause
an accident.
∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill, never
attempt to turn around. Your vehicle
could tip or roll over. Always back
straight down in R (Reverse) gear and
apply brakes to control your speed.
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and
fade, resulting in loss of control and
an accident. Apply brakes lightly and
use a low gear to control your speed.
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will
not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.
∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as possible.
Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this manual.
This could cause your vehicle to roll
over.
∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
Starting and driving 5-9
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.
∙ Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
engaged.
∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Install tire chains on
the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional
information, refer to “Maintenance
schedules” in the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive
vehicle has a higher center of gravity
than a passenger car. The vehicle is
not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
could result in loss of control and/or a
rollover accident.
5-10 Starting and driving
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For
additional information, refer to “Wet
brakes” in this section.
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.
LSD2014
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed
and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot
be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch position cannot be placed
in the OFF position until the shift lever is
moved to the P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
Starting and driving 5-11
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
1 .
function is inside of the vehicle 䊊
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
LSD2456
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
5-12 Starting and driving
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories, such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
∙ The turn signals are off.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
∙ The hazard lamps are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
∙ Any door is opened.
LOCK (Normal parking position)
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
∙ The hazard lamps are off.
∙ The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position
when the engine is not running for an
extended period. This can discharge the
battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. If equipped, the ignition
switch heart beat function (pulsed illumination) may activate for a period of time
when any door is unlocked and when the
door opened/closed status changes in the
OFF and ACC positions.
∙ Any door is opened.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.
∙ The turn signals are turned on.
∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for
more than 2 seconds.
SSD0860
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
Starting and driving 5-13
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
After step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedure, the
Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the
battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ”
section of this manual.
5-14 Starting and driving
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake fluid, Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(Diesel only) and windshield-washer
fluid as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Check that all doors are closed.
∙ Position seat and
restraints/headrests.
adjust
head
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
STARTING THE ENGINE (gasoline
engine only)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the shift lever is in either P
(Park) or N (Neutral).
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch
to the ON position to start cranking
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine
with your foot off the accelerator
pedal by depressing the brake pedal
and pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever
into the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
In preparation for the next engine start, the
engine may have a slightly delayed shutoff
after placing the ignition switch in the OFF
position, depending on the driving conditions.
NOTE:
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before
shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time
may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Starting and driving 5-15
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
STARTING THE ENGINE (diesel only)
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
For additional information on starting your
diesel engine, refer to your Titan Diesel
Owner’s Manual.
ENGINE PROTECTION MODE
The engine has an engine protection mode
to reduce the chance of damage if the
coolant temperature becomes too high
(for example, when climbing steep grades
in high temperatures with heavy loads,
such as when towing a trailer). When the
engine temperature reaches a certain
level:
∙ The engine coolant temperature gauge
will move toward the H position.
∙ Engine power may be reduced.
∙ The air conditioning cooling function
may be automatically turned off for a
short time (the blower will continue to
operate).
Engine power and, under some conditions,
vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed
can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at
the desired speed. The transmission will
downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift
manually.
As driving conditions change and engine
coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle
speed can be increased using the accel-
5-16 Starting and driving
erator pedal, and the air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned
back on.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
also come on if the engine coolant temperature is not reduced or the air conditioning cooling function does not turn back
on. If only it remains on, you do not need to
have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected soon. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For
additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful when
driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a
safe driving speed, pull to the side of the
road in a safe area. Allow the engine to
cool and return to normal operation. For
additional information, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always
depress the brake pedal until shifting
is completed. Failure to do so could
cause you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose
The A/T in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and
smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Starting and driving 5-17
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), or D (Drive). Always
depress the brake pedal until shifting
is completed. Failure to do so could
cause you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
5-18 Starting and driving
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed
so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to
any drive position while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.
LSD2468
To move the shift lever:
: Shift while depressing the brake
pedal
: Shift without depressing the brake
pedal
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever out of
the P (Park) position.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in
the LOCK position. Move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position, then the ignition
switch can be placed in the LOCK position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
LSD2457
Manual shift mode
When the manual shift mode button is
pressed while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the
meter. After pressing the manual shift
mode button, the position indicator varies
depending on the gear position and vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-19
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6
←→ M7* ←→ D
M4 (Fourth)
M1 (First)
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking would be advantageous.
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,
sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
*If so equipped
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped)
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6
←→ M7
M3 (Third)
M7 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M6 (Sixth)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6
M6 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than M4 range. This reduces fuel
economy.
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
When shifting up
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
Push the shift switch to the + (up) side.
(Shifts to higher range.)
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3
When shifting down
M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
Push the shift switch to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
M2 (Second)
M5 (Fifth)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5
M1 ←→ M2
M5 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
5-20 Starting and driving
M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on the meter.
∙ The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the 3rd range, the transmission
will shift down between the 3rd and 1st
gears.)
∙ Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shift
the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
To push the shift lock release, complete the
following procedure:
Press and hold the +(UP) button to return
the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
gear immediately because of vehicle
speed. The transmission will up or
down shift when vehicle speed
matches the programmed transmission shift points. This helps maintain
driving performance and reduces the
chance of vehicle damage or loss of
control.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the transmission will not up shift to a higher
gear than is manually selected. When
the vehicle speed decreases, the
transmission automatically shifts
down and shifts to 1st gear before the
vehicle comes to a stop.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover. If a
screwdriver is used to remove the
cover, it should be wrapped in a protective cloth to prevent damage to the
cover and surrounding plastic.
LSD2594
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift lever, release the shift
lock. The shift lever can be moved to N
(Neutral). However, for models without the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, the
steering wheel will be locked unless the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
This allows the vehicle to be moved if the
battery is discharged.
4. Insert a small object or finger in the
shift lock release slot and push.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding the shift lock release.
6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the
desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the automatic transmission
system checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-21
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, please
note that the transmission will be locked in
any of the forward gears according to the
condition.
5-22 Starting and driving
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 3 seconds. Then
place the ignition switch back in the ON
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
return to its normal operating condition,
have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
LSD0158
To engage: Firmly depress the parking
brake.
To release:
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.
LSD2619
1
The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-23
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
LSD2605
5-24 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving
situations” in this section.
LSD2607
Starting and driving 5-25
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
When the BSW system is enabled in the
vehicle information display, the system can
be turned off temporarily by pushing the
warning systems switch. For additional information, refer to “Warning systems
switch” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system:
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.
Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.
2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the
ENTER button.
NOTE:
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
5-26 Starting and driving
∙ When the BSW system is turned on,
the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the
vehicle information display illuminates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate
from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensor’s detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
Another vehicle approaching
from behind
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt
vehicle
∙
build-up
on
the
Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound,
and it may not be heard.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator
on
Indicator
off
Indicator
flashing
Starting and driving 5-27
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
LSD2300
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
5-28 Starting and driving
LSD2302
Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that
vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
LSD2303
Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
LSD2305
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from either side.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
Starting and driving 5-29
∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.
LSD2308
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
5-30 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the blind spot indicator
A in the vehicle informa(white) will blink 䊊
tion display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2608
Starting and driving 5-31
Malfunction
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Radio frequency statement
Action to take:
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
For USA
LSD2619
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
5-32 Starting and driving
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
For Canada
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Applicable law: Canada 310
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When backing out
of a parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Starting and driving 5-33
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from the side, the system chimes a sound
(single beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light on the side of the vehicle is approaching from flashes.
LSD2605
5-34 Starting and driving
LSD2216
1
The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
LSD2619
1 can detect an apThe radar sensors 䊊
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.
Starting and driving 5-35
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
When the RCTA system is enabled in the
vehicle information display, the system can
be turned off temporarily by pushing the
Front and rear sonar system OFF switch.
For additional information, refer to “Front
and rear sonar system OFF switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system:
button until “Settings”
1. Press the
displays in the vehicle information disbutton to select
play. Use the
“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.
Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.
2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press the
ENTER button.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.
LSD2607
5-36 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater
than
approximately
19 mph (30 km/h)
LSD2173
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching
vehicles
in
certain
situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
Starting and driving 5-37
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the
vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
5-38 Starting and driving
LSD2043
Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
LSD2044
Illustration 2
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
A in the vehicle informa(white) will blink 䊊
tion display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2608
Starting and driving 5-39
Malfunction
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the
BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in
the vehicle information display.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Radio frequency statement
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
For USA
LSD2619
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
5-40 Starting and driving
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
CRUISE CONTROL
For Canada
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Applicable law: Canada 310
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
LSD2464
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The
(green) indicator light illuminates in the
vehicle information display then blinks
to warn the driver.
Starting and driving 5-41
∙ If the
(green) indicator light blinks,
push the ON/OFF switch off and have
the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
(green) indicator light may
∙ The
blink when the ON/OFF switch is
pushed ON while pushing the
ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL
switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
(white) indiON/OFF switch on. The
cator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The
(green) indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
maintains the set speed.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
5-42 Starting and driving
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
indi∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the
cator light in the vehicle information
display goes out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the
light goes out.
indicator
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The
indicator light in the vehicle information
display goes out.
The cruise control is automatically canindicator light in the
celed and the
vehicle information display goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted
from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
CAUTION
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
Starting and driving 5-43
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5-44 Starting and driving
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
, use
∙ For vehicles equipped with
4H or 4L position only when necessary.
4-wheel drive operation lowers fuel
economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or
4LO position on dry hard surface
roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in
4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
noise, tire wear and increased fuel
consumption.
If the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message
turns on when you are driving on dry
hard surface roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift lever to the N
(Neutral) position with the brake
pedal depressed, and shift the
4WD shift switch to 2WD.
∙ If the warning light or vehicle information display warning message is
still on after the above operation,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-45
TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
PROCEDURES
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select
the desired drive mode according to the
driving conditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
4WD Shift Switch
Position
2WD
Wheels Driven
4WD shift
Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position
Use Conditions
Rear wheels
For driving on dry, paved
roads (Economy drive)
4 wheels
For driving on rocky, sandy
or snow-covered roads
4H
*1
May blink
N (Neutral) disengages the
automatic transmission
(A/T) mechanical parking
lock, which will allow the
vehicle to roll. Do not leave
the transfer shift position
in N (Neutral).*2
Illuminated
For use when maximum
power and traction is required (for example: on
steep grades or rocky,
sandy, muddy roads)
N (Neutral)
4LO
4 wheels
5-46 Starting and driving
4WD Shift Procedure
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> 4H
The 4WD shift indicator light will indicate
that the transfer shift position is engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE
SHIFT LEVER TO THE N (NEUTRAL) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS
OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. With the brake pedal depressed,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
3. With the brake pedal depressed,
depress and turn the 4WD shift
switch to 4LO or 4H.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO
4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED
THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE
PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO
N (NEUTRAL). *3
*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift
procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator
is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the N (Neutral) position.
- If the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the
transfer case to the correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light or vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to
take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and
no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
indicator light will also
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.
Starting and driving 5-47
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used
to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on
the driving conditions. There are three
types of drive modes available: 2WD, 4H and
4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls
the transfer case operation. Rotate the
switch to move between each mode: 2WD,
4H and 4LO.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, move the shift lever
to N (Neutral), and depress the brake
pedal. The switch must be pushed and
turned to select 4LO.
WARNING
∙ When parking, apply the parking
brake before stopping the engine and
make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the Automatic
Transmission park (ATP) warning light
goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could
unexpectedly move even if the A/T is
in the P position.
∙ The 4LO indicator light must stop
blinking and remain illuminated or
turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the shift lever is
shifted from the N (Neutral) position
to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may
move unexpectedly.
CAUTION
∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
∙ The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will
cause increased fuel consumption
and higher oil temperatures, and
could damage drivetrain components.
Speeds
over
62
mph
(100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.
∙ The 4LO position provides maximum
power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h).
∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch
when making a turn or reversing.
5-48 Starting and driving
∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
brake and low A/T gears (M1 or M2) for
engine braking.
∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
wheels spinning.
∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on
dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may
cause unnecessary noise and tire
wear. NISSAN recommends driving in
the 2WD position under these
conditions.
∙ The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low
ambient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may
blink even when the 4WD shift switch
is shifted. After driving for a while you
can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO.
When driving on rough roads,
∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
∙ Drive carefully according to the road
surface conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck,
CAUTION
∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch
when making a turn or reversing.
∙ Place stones or wooden blocks under
the tires to free the vehicle.
∙ Use the Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For
additional information, refer to “Electronic locking rear differential (E-lock)
system” in this section.
∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch
while driving on steep downhill
grades. Use the engine brake and low
automatic transmission gears (M1 or
M2) for engine braking.
∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the
vehicle back and forth between reverse
and drive gears.
∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
stones or wooden blocks under the
tires. Then try the recovery procedures
above. Tire chains may be effective.
CAUTION
∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
∙ Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.
∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
with the rear wheels spinning.
LSD2463
4WD shift switch operations
∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the
2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on
driving conditions.
∙ If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you
may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.
∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
vehicle speed is less than 62 mph
(100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.
∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
∙ You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages. This is not abnormal.
Starting and driving 5-49
∙ If the 4WD warning light or the vehicle
information display warning message
comes on, the 4WD indicator light goes
out.
CAUTION
LSD2328
4WD shift indicator light
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in
the vehicle information display.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift
indicator light will illuminate the position
selected by the 4WD shift switch.
∙ The 4WD shift indicator light may
come on while shifting from one drive
mode to the other. When the shifting
is completed, the 4WD shift indicator
light will stay on.
5-50 Starting and driving
∙ If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD
shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the
2WD mode may be being engaged
due to malfunctioning drive system. If
the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light or the
vehicle information display warning
message comes on, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Warning light or warning message
Warning light (if so
equipped)
Warning message
Trip computer (if so
Vehicle information disequipped)
play (if so equipped)
4WD ERROR
Illuminates
—
4WD TIRES
4WD Error: See Owner’s
Manual
FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner’s
Manual
Warning light or warning
message comes on
when:
There is a malfunction in
the 4–wheel drive system
The difference in wheel
rotation is large
The 4WD warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
It turns off soon after the engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the igntion switch is in the ON
position, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.
If the “4WD TIRES” warning message comes
on, change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD
and do not drive fast.
CAUTION
∙ If the warning light or warning message comes on during operation or
rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a
while, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
recommended when the 4WD warning light or warning message turns
on.
Starting and driving 5-51
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ When the warning light or warning
message comes on, the 2WD mode
may be engaged even if the 4WD shift
switch is in 4H. Be especially careful
when driving. If corresponding parts
are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode
will not be engaged even if the 4WD
shift switch is shifted.
∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or
4LO position on dry hard surface
roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in
4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
noise, tire wear and increased fuel
consumption.
If the 4WD warning light or warning
message turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– In the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the automatic transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal
depressed, and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
∙ If the warning light or warning message is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light or warning message on.
The E-Lock system can provide additional
traction and should only be used when a
vehicle has become or is becoming stuck.
This system operates by electronically
“locking” the two rear drive wheels together, allowing them to turn at the same
speed. The system is used when it is not
possible to free a stuck vehicle even when
using the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles).
When added traction is required, activate
the E-Lock system by pushing the switch
on. For additional information, refer to
“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual. Once the
system fully engages, the indicator light in
the instrument panel will remain on. When
the system is activated, both rear wheels
will engage, providing added traction.
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or
move to engage the system, and the system will only engage up to approximately
4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the
system should be turned off and driving
resumed.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when
the E-Lock system is on.
5-52 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on
when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle
may result in the rear wheels slipping
and result in an accident and personal
injury. After using the E-Lock system
to free the vehicle, turn the system off.
∙ Use the E-Lock system only in an
emergency when it is not possible to
free a stuck vehicle even when using
4LO. Never use the E-Lock system on a
slippery road surface such as snow or
ice surface. Using the E-Lock system
when driving in these road conditions
may cause unexpected movement of
the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
∙ Observe the above warnings. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control
may result. This may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ After using the E-Lock system, or during normal driving, turn the switch off
to prevent possible damage to the
drivetrain components from extended use.
∙ Observe the above cautions. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control
may result.
∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock
system is in operation. Otherwise, the
drivetrain components could be
damaged.
∙ When the E-Lock system is in operation, turning the vehicle becomes difficult. This can be dangerous, especially at high speeds. Doing so could
damage the drivetrain components.
∙ Do not operate the E-Lock system
when the vehicle is turning or when
one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,
the drivetrain components could be
damaged.
∙ The E-Lock system operates only
when the engine is running.
∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does
not operate when the E-Lock system
switch is turned to the ON position.
(The E-Lock system indicator light will
flash.)
Starting and driving 5-53
ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)
2
䊊
3
䊊
The average fuel economy since the
last reset will be displayed.
The best fuel economy of the past history will be displayed.
The ECO drive report can be set to be ON or
OFF.
LSD2472
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, ECO management display appears.
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
Previous 5 times (History)
Current fuel economy
Best fuel economy
The result of ECO evaluation is displayed
30 seconds after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position and the vehicle is
driven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).
1
䊊
The average fuel economy for the previous 5 times will be displayed.
5-54 Starting and driving
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WSD0050
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident. Make sure the
shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the foot
brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
A :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
Starting and driving 5-55
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,
you will still have control of the vehicle.
However, much greater steering effort is
needed, especially in sharp turns and at
low speeds.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
5-56 Starting and driving
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Starting and driving 5-57
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-58 Starting and driving
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM
∙ The ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping
drive wheel to the wheel on the same
axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping
wheel, which helps redirect power to
the other wheel.
∙ On 4WD models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD
mode is engaged, the ABLS system operates for both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the ABLS system operates on the
drive axle only.
∙ The ABLS system is always on. In some
conditions, the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off. If the system is automatically turned off, normal
brake function will continue. ABLS will
function even when the VDC system is
turned off.
∙ The ABLS system does not operate if
both wheels on a drive axle are slipping.
WARNING
∙ The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent
accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the ABLS system may not operate
properly and the slip indicator light
may illuminate.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN approved for your vehicle
or are extremely deteriorated, the
ABLS system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the
slip indicator light may illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the
slip indicator light may illuminate.
Starting and driving 5-59
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into
indicator light will come
4LO the
on and the VDC system will be turned
off. For additional information, refer to
“Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in this section.
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
5-60 Starting and driving
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
indicator light will come on in the
the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator
lights are off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator illumiVDC system. The
nates to indicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
ON when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator
light
may
the
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are exinditremely deteriorated, the
cator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
Starting and driving 5-61
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator
light
may
the
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are exinditremely deteriorated, the
cator light may illuminate.
5-62 Starting and driving
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle
speed when driving on steep downhill
grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent
control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or
extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle
and possible serious injury or death.
∙ The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under
all load or road conditions. Always be
prepared to depress the brake pedal
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
The hill descent control system can only be
activated when the 4H or 4LO position is
engaged.
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
The hill descent control system helps
maintain vehicle speed when driving under
15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill
grades. Hill descent control is useful when
engine braking alone cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the
vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing the driver to concentrate on steering while reducing the burden of brake and
accelerator operation.
If the hill descent control system ON indicator light is blinking, the hill descent control
is engaged; however, the hill descent control will not control the vehicle speed.
∙ Once the system is activated, the indicator light will remain on in the instrument panel. For additional information,
refer to “Hill descent control system ON
indicator light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
∙ You may hear a noise from under the
hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This indicates
that the hill descent control system is
working properly.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating
temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
brake pedal is released, the hill descent
control system begins to function again if
the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
For the best results, when descending
steep downhill grades, the hill descent control switch should be ON and the shift lever
in M1 (First) for engine braking. For additional information, refer to “Hill descent
control switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward on a hill. Always
drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury
or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
∙ The hill start assist may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on
a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-63
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied. This helps prevents the
vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
takes the driver to release the brake pedal
and apply the accelerator when the vehicle
is stopped on a hill.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and
check that it is safe to do so before
parking.
∙ Read and understand the limitations
of the Front and rear sonar system as
contained in this section. The colors of
the corner sonar indicator and the
distance guide lines in the front/rear
view indicate different distances to
the object.
Hill start assist will operate automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ The shift lever is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.
LSD2465
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and hill start assist will stop operating
completely.
The Front and rear sonar system sounds a
tone to inform the driver of obstacles near
the bumper.
Hill start assist will not operate when the
shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P
(Park) or on a flat and level road. When the
VDC warning light illuminates in the meter,
the hill start assist system will not operate.
When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar
view will automatically appear in the meter.
5-64 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ The Front and rear sonar system is a
convenience but it is not a substitute
for proper parking.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect
the function of the system; this may
include reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ This function is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
Always move slowly. The system will
not detect small objects below the
bumper, and may not detect objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as
snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.,
and thin objects such as rope, wire
and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped
objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system
volume or an open vehicle window)
will interfere with the tone and it may
not be heard.
∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on
the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. Do
not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the
accuracy of the sonar function will be
diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of front obstacles when the shift
lever is in the D (Drive) position and both
front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Sonar Operation Table
FR Sensor
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only
the corner sensor and the distance does
not change. The tone will stop when the
obstacle gets away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator
(green) appears and blinks and the tone
sounds intermittently. When the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the color of the
indicator turns yellow and the rate of the
blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops
blinking and turns red, and the tone
sounds continuously.
RR Sensor
Range
Sound
Display
Sound
P
x
†
x
Display
†
R
o
o
o
o
N
x
†
x
†
D
o
o
x
†
o – Display/Beep when detect
† – Display on camera view
x – No Display and Beep
The system is deactivated at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Starting and driving 5-65
LSD2466
When the corner of the vehicle moves
closer to an object, the corner sonar indiA appears.
cator 䊊
5-66 Starting and driving
LSD2467
A will appear when
The system indicators 䊊
the vehicle moves closer to an object.
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
SONAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition is in the ON position and
the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the sonar system:
1. Push the Front and rear sonar system
OFF switch (the orange light will go out)
to turn the system off.
2. To turn the system back on, push the
switch (the orange light will illuminate)
and the system will be enabled. For additional information, refer to “Front and
rear sonar system OFF switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
NOTE:
The system will automatically be turned
on when the engine is restarted.
LSD2660
Starting and driving 5-67
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the sonar system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always turn and look back
before backing up. The sonar system
is not a substitute for proper
procedures.
∙ Read and understand the limitations
of the sonar system as contained in
this section. Inclement weather may
affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
∙ This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving
objects.
5-68 Starting and driving
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper, and
may not detect objects close to the
bumper or on the ground.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect
the function of the system; this may
include reduced performance or a
false activation.
∙ The system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
Always move slowly. The system will
not detect small objects below the
bumper or on the ground.
∙ The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as
snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.,
and thin objects such as rope, wire
and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped
objects.
∙ The system may not detect objects at
speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and
may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reactivated at lower speeds.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the sonar sensors. It is recommended that
you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area
around the sonar sensors is damaged due
to a collision.
LSD2471
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 are located on the
The sonar sensors 䊊
front and rear bumpers. Always keep the
area near the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the sonar sensors.
Starting and driving 5-69
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
5-70 Starting and driving
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
the
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
∙ Engine block heaters should be used
when the outside temperature is 0ºF
(-17ºC) or lower.
∙ Engine block heaters run continuously
while plugged into the correct voltage
electrical outlet.
WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
NOTE:
When using the engine block heater (if so
equipped) on an Applied Vehicle (engine
block heater is plugged in):
∙ Vehicle should be parked on a level
surface.
Or
∙ If a level surface is not available, the
vehicle should be parked with the
front of the truck lower than the rear
(nose down).
CAUTION
Use of the engine block heater when
parked with the front of the vehicle
higher than the rear (5 degrees or more)
may cause the engine block heater to
become damaged and/or inoperative.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to
Starting and driving 5-71
MEMO
5-72 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit on vehicles equipped with a trip
computer (if so equipped), and the Tire
Pressure Low — Add Air warning appears in
the vehicle information display (if so
equipped), one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the
system also displays pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will remain on after one minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
In case of emergency 6-3
Getting the spare tire and tools
(Crew and King Cab® models)
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. For
additional information, refer to “Folding
the rear bench seat up” in the “Safety—
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142
A.
Tire stoppers
B.
Flat Tire
Blocking wheels
Place tire stoppers, supplied with jack, at
both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the
vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
LCE2374
A .
2. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊
B.
3. Release the straps 䊊
4. Collapse the jack to remove it from the
storage location. Loosen the jack with
your fingers until the jack is free.
5. Remove the jack and tool kit.
WCE0150
WCE0151
6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.
Find the oval-shaped opening above
the license plate, slightly to the left of
the middle (driver’s side). Pass the
T-shaped end of the jack rod through
the opening and direct it toward the
spare tire winch, located directly above
the spare tire.
7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into
the square hole of the wheel nut
wrench to form a handle.
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod
into the T-shaped opening of the tire
winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack
rod engaged in the spare tire winch
and turn the jack rod counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire.
9. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove
the retainer chain and carefully slide
the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-5
10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the
vehicle, from where the full size spare
was removed.
11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse
steps 1 through 5.
CAUTION
Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift
the spare tire.
Getting the spare tire and tools
(Single Cab models)
1. Move the front passenger seat to access the tools. For additional information about seat functions, refer to “
Seats” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts
and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
LCE2280
WCE0150
2. Remove the lid from the tool storage
compartment.
6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.
Find the oval-shaped opening above
the license plate, slightly to the left of
the middle (driver’s side). Pass the
T-shaped end of the jack rod through
the opening and direct it toward the
spare tire winch, located directly above
the spare tire.
A .
3. Release the straps 䊊
B.
4. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊
C .
5. Remove the tool kit and jack 䊊
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
6-6 In case of emergency
10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the
vehicle, from where the full size spare
was removed.
11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse
steps 1 through 5.
CAUTION
Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift
the spare tire.
WCE0151
7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into
the square hole of the wheel nut
wrench to form a handle.
8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod
into the T-shaped opening of the tire
winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack
rod engaged in the spare tire winch
and turn the jack rod counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire.
LCE2327
Getting the spare tire and tools
(King Cab® models not equipped
with rear seat)
1. Open the passenger side rear door and
remove the lid from the tool storage
compartment.
9. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove
the retainer chain and carefully slide
the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-7
A .
2. Release the straps 䊊
LCE2328
B.
3. Remove the tire stopper bag 䊊
C to access the
4. Lift the storage cover 䊊
jack.
5. Remove the tool kit and jack.
WCE0150
WCE0151
6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.
Find the oval-shaped opening above
the license plate, slightly to the left of
the middle (driver’s side). Pass the
T-shaped end of the jack rod through
the opening and direct it toward the
spare tire winch, located directly above
the spare tire.
7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into
the square hole of the wheel nut
wrench to form a handle.
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
6-8 In case of emergency
8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod
into the T-shaped opening of the tire
winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack
rod engaged in the spare tire winch
and turn the jack rod counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire.
9. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove
the retainer chain and carefully slide
the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.
10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the
vehicle, from where the full size spare
was removed.
11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse
steps 1 through 5.
CAUTION
Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift
the spare tire.
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire (all models)
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
In case of emergency 6-9
2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head under
the arrow stamped on the side of the
frame or rear as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
WCE0152
Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
6-10 In case of emergency
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.
LCE2012
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
LCE0087
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the
jack as shown.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle
until the tire clears the ground.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 )
sequence illustrated (䊊
until they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-11
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illus5 ,䊊
6 ). Lower the
1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
trated (䊊
vehicle completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Non-XD models:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
6-12 In case of emergency
XD models:
131 ft-lb (177 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mi. (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display(if so equipped)
of the tire pressure information may
show higher pressure than the COLD tire
pressure after the vehicle has been
driven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is
because the tire pressure increases as
the tire temperature rises. This does not
indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the tools and jacking
equipment in the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to the “Getting the
spare tire and tools (Crew and King
Cab® models),” “Getting the spare tire
and tools (Single Cab models)” or “Getting the spare tire and tools (King Cab®
models not equipped with rear seat)” in
this section.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-13
CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
LCE2223
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-
6-14 In case of emergency
sary electrical systems (lights, heater,
air conditioner, etc.).
3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
4. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the seD ).
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
quence illustrated (䊊
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.
PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by
pushing.
CAUTION
∙ Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started.
Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
∙ Three way catalyst equipped models
should not be started by pushing
since the three way catalyst may be
damaged.
∙ Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to
collide with the tow vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. If engine overheating is caused by
climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the
engine at a fast idle (approximately
1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge
indication returns to normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
6. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
In case of emergency 6-15
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
7. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir
tank if necessary. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment
could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and
procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage
to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator
carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
∙ If your vehicle has front recovery
hooks as original factory equipment,
do not remove or modify them. If it
was not equipped with front recovery
hooks, do not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system resulting in
injury or death.
6-16 In case of emergency
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to "Flat
towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle" or
"Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
LCE2141
4WD models with automatic
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with
an automatic transmission with any of
the wheels on the ground as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transfer case and transmission.
LCE2140
2WD models with automatic
transmission
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.
In case of emergency 6-17
CAUTION
∙ Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transmission. If it is necessary
to tow the vehicle with the front
wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
There are two options to recover a stuck
vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional
information regarding these options,
please refer to the following sections.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may cause damage
to the lock mechanism (if so
equipped).
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
additional information.
6-18 In case of emergency
∙ Attach recovery devices only to main
structural members of the vehicle or
the recovery hooks.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear
Differential (E-Lock) system (if so
equipped). For additional information,
refer to “Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
(55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h)
if the E–Lock system (if so equipped)
is engaged.
6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
3. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
In case of emergency 6-19
MEMO
6-20 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . .
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
WAXING
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.
7-2 Appearance and care
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
CAUTION
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Do not use chrome cleaner on any
wheel. Doing so can damage the
chrome-like coating on the wheel.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.
CAUTION
Do not use chrome cleaner on any
wheel. Doing so can damage the
chrome-like coating on the wheel.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather surfaces (if so
equipped) with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (if so equipped). This can
also affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious personal
injury.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
7-4 Appearance and care
WARNING
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
LAI2087
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Appearance and care 7-5
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position and with
the parking brake fully applied, position
the floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and with
the parking brake applied, fully apply
and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
7-6 Appearance and care
LAI2088
Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
CORROSION PROTECTION
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
∙ The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Temperature
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
Relative humidity
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
Appearance and care 7-7
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
7-8 Appearance and care
MEMO
Appearance and care 7-9
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Fuel filter (CUMMINS 5.0L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Fuel filter replacement (stage 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Fuel filter replacement (stage 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Fuel system priming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Automatic regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
6-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
(diesel engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
7-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
(gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Variable voltage control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-17
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Spark plugs (gasoline engine only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Daytime Running Light (DRL)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park)
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if so
equipped) may come on at any time
without warning, even if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for service of the fuel filter or
fuel lines.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VK56VD engine (non-XD model)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
Fuse box
Engine oil dipstick
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse/Fusible link box
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir
LDI3056
Do-it-yourself 8-3
VK56VD engine (XD model)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
Fuse box
Engine oil dipstick
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse/Fusible link box
Engine coolant reservoir
Drive belt location
Battery
Radiator cap
For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L engine, refer to the “Titan Diesel
Owner’s Manual”.
LDI2973
8-4 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, it is recommended that
you use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, it is
recommended that you use only
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water may reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L engine cooling system, refer to
the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
LDI3004
VK56VD engine (non-XD model)
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
B , add coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty,
to the MAX level 䊊
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
A .
level 䊊
8-6 Do-it-yourself
LDI2823
VK56VD engine (XD model)
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
ENGINE OIL
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.
For additional information on changing the
Cummins 5.0L engine coolant, refer to the
“Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
LDI2956
VK56VD engine
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
15 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
LDI0371
VK56VD engine
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the
A ,
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
C .
Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than
15 minutes.
A by turning it
4. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.
For additional information on checking the
Cummins 5.0L engine oil level, refer to the
“Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
5. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊
B with a
6. Remove the drain plug 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
LDI2957
VK56VD engine
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
8. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
9. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than
15 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
For additional information on changing the
Cummins 5.0L engine oil, refer to the “Titan
Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
LDI3005
Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
A and skid plate.
3. Remove bolts 䊊
Do-it-yourself 8-9
LDI2875
Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)
LDI2876
Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)
LDI2958
VK56VD engine
4. Place a large drain pan under the oil
B.
filter 䊊
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
an oil leak and engine damage.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lb (18 N·m)
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Install skid plate in reverse order of removal.
FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L)
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage
1)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
AUTOMATIC REGENERATION
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage
2)
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
DRAINING WATER
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
6-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (diesel
engine only)
7-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)
(gasoline engine only)
When checking or replacement is required,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When checking or replacement is required,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
CAUTION
CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN Matic K ATF. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual transmission fluid in this transmission.
Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not
covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual transmission fluid in this transmission.
Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not
covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may also
damage the transmission. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other than
as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may also
damage the transmission. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other than
as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid
is also described on caution labels located
in the engine compartment.
The specified automatic transmission fluid
is also described on caution labels located
in the engine compartment.
8-12 Do-it-yourself
POWER STEERING FLUID
LDI3077
Check the power steering fluid level when
the engine is stopped.
The fluid level should be between the COLD
MAX line and the COLD MIN line on the
power steering fluid reservoir at cold fluid
temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or at
the HOT MAX line on the power steering
fluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of
122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).
BRAKE FLUID
If the fluid is cold and is at or below the
COLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF II or
equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If the fluid
is hot and below the HOT MAX line, add
Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent to the
HOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fill
through the opening.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
CAUTION
∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
∙ Do not reuse power steering fluid.
∙ Recommended fluid is
NISSAN PSF II or equivalent
Genuine
LDI3088
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the
vehicle’s stopping ability.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
B , the
brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
A . For addibrake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
tional information on recommended type
of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Anti-freeze or equivalent.
LDI2879
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on or
the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if
so equipped) shows on the vehicle information display.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.
BATTERY
∙ If the battery is labeled "do not open" it
is maintenance free and battery fluid
should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
or a qualified specialist workshop to
confirm the battery’s performance.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes before disconnecting the battery.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ This vehicle uses a special battery. If
the 12-volt battery needs to be replaced, use a 12-volt battery of the
same design.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect
the battery case.
WDI0529
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL (if so
equipped)
DRIVE BELT
The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you
add electrical accessories to your vehicle,
be sure to ground them to a suitable body
ground such as the frame or engine block
area.
WDI0661
LDI2132
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
VK56VD engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Power steering fluid pump pulley
Automatic belt tensioner pulley
Water pump pulley
Cooling fan pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Generator pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belt.
The
engine
could
rotate
unexpectedly.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
SPARK PLUGS (gasoline engine
only)
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule. For
additional information, refer to the
"Maintenance and schedules" section
of this manual.
For additional information on the Cummins 5.0L engine drive belt, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2972
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridiumtipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
8-18 Do-it-yourself
AIR CLEANER
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
push the tabs and pull the cover upward.
The viscous paper type filter element
should not be cleaned and reused. Replace
the air filter according to the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.
LDI2960
VK56VD engine
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information on change
intervals, refer to “Gasoline standard maintenance" or "Diesel standard maintenance" in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the tabs.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
CAUTION
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
LDI2725
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A , and
2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊
B
then move the wiper blade down 䊊
the wiper arm to remove.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
8-20 Do-it-yourself
BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information on
the appropriate maintenance schedule regarding brake inspections, refer to "Gasoline standard maintenance" or "Diesel
standard maintenance" in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
LDI2710
Be careful not to let anything get into the
D . This may cause clogging
washer nozzle 䊊
or improper windshield–washer operation.
If something gets into the nozzle, remove it
C .
with a needle or small pin 䊊
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
FUSES
LDI0455
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊 and
B are used in the fuse boxes in the engine
䊊
B is used in the pascompartment. Type 䊊
senger compartment fuse box.
A
B fuses are provided as spare fuses.
Type 䊊
They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.
Type 䊊 fuses can be installed in the engine
compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.
A
LDI2962
LDI0457
If a type 䊊 fuse is used to replace a type 䊊
A fuse will not be level with
fuse, the type 䊊
the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.
This will not affect the performance of the
fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the
fuse box securely.
A
B
B fuses cannot be used to replace
Type 䊊
A fuses.
type 䊊
VK56VD engine
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
8-22 Do-it-yourself
LDI3073
VK56VD engine (non-XD model)
2. Open the engine hood.
LDI3074
VK56VD engine (XD model)
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
LDI2882
Cummins 5.0L engine
Do-it-yourself 8-23
LDI2826
A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
new fuse 䊊
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.
8-24 Do-it-yourself
LDI0456
LDI2883
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the glove box.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
LDI2884
5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
A .
䊊
LDI2760
B , replace it with an
6. If the fuse is open 䊊
C .
equivalent good fuse 䊊
7. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
CAUTION
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
A
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it
into the slit 䊊
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2001
8-26 Do-it-yourself
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and 䊊
D.
䊊
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
LDI2637
Do-it-yourself 8-27
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly
must be removed from the vehicle for bulb
replacement, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.
8-28 Do-it-yourself
∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) (if
so equipped)
For additional information on the DRL bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
NOTE:
The fog light is accessible in front of the
front tire and behind the bumper.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes.
LDI2924
Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable.
3. Disconnect the bulb connector.
A counterclockwise
4. Rotate the bulb 䊊
and remove.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the
fog light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not
touch the glass envelope.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
LDI2925
Fog light assembly (Type A)
(if so equipped) (Canada only)
Replacing the daytime running
light bulb (Canada only)
LDI2954
Daytime running light (if so equipped)
(Canada only)
3. Disconnect the daytime running light
bulb connector.
NOTE:
4. Rotate the daytime running light bulb
A counterclockwise and remove.
䊊
The daytime running light is accessible
in front of the front tire and behind the
bumper.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the
fog light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not
touch the glass envelope.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
Low (Halogen)
High (Halogen)
Turn/Park
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
Low
High (Halogen)
Daytime running/Park
Turn
Side marker
Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)
(Canada only)
Fog
Daytime running
Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)*
Puddle light (if so equipped)*
Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped)*
Stop
Backup (reversing)
Turn/Tail
Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped)*
Stop
Backup (reversing)
Turn/Tail
Cargo (tailgate) (if so equipped)
High-mounted stop light*
Stop
Cargo (roof)
Under rail bed light (if so equipped)*
License plate light*
Map light (if so equipped)*
Room light (if so equipped)*
Footwell light (if so equipped)*
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)*
Glove box light (if so equipped)*
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.*
55
60
28/8
5
H11
HB3
7444NA
W5W
—
60
—
28/8
5
—
HB3
—
7444NA
W5W
35
13
55
—
—
H8
P13W
H11
—
—
16
18
27/7
PW16W
921
3057K
—
18
27/7
18
—
921
3057K
921
—
—
—
—
8
8
3.4
—
1.4
—
—
—
—
—
—
158
—
—
* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Do-it-yourself 8-31
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
LDI2890
8-32 Do-it-yourself
Headlight assembly
Map light (if so equipped)
Room light (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light
(if so equipped)
Puddle light (if so equipped)
Fog light (if so equipped)
High-mount stop light
Under rail bed light (if so equipped)
License plate light
Rear combination light
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
LDI2951
Rear combination light
NOTE:
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Rear combination light (Type B) (if so
equipped) bulb replacement procedure
is shown. Rear combination light (Type A)
(if so equipped) bulb replacement procedure is similar.
To replace the rear combination light bulbs
perform the following procedure:
A and pull
1. Remove the two fasteners 䊊
the rear combination light away from
the vehicle.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
WHEELS AND TIRES
Reverse steps to install bulbs and rear
combination light.
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
LDI2952
Rear combination light
2. Remove harness connector and rotate
B counterclockwise to
stop light bulb 䊊
remove. Replace bulb if necessary.
3. Rotate reverse light bulb socket 䊊
counterclockwise to remove. Replace
bulb if necessary.
C
4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socket
D (if so equipped) counterclockwise to
䊊
remove. Replace bulb if necessary.
E
5. Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket 䊊
counterclockwise to remove. Replace
bulb if necessary.
8-34 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all four
tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit and
the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays
pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section,
and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
provides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating tires
to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information,
refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire
Alert” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly
and
cause
an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊
2
䊊
8-36 Do-it-yourself
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
3
䊊
LDI2926
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
4
䊊
5
䊊
6
䊊
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Spare tire size.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Size
Front Original
Tire:
265/70R18
P265/70R18
P275/60R20
P275/70R18
LT245/75R17
LT275/65R18
LT265/60R20
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
270 kPa, 39 psi
250 kPa, 36 psi
250 kPa, 36 psi
240 kPa, 35 psi
450 kPa, 65 psi
450 kPa, 65 psi
450 kPa, 65 psi
Size
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Rear Original
Tire:
265/70R18
P265/70R18
P275/60R20
P275/70R18
LT245/75R17
LT275/65R18
LT265/60R20
270 kPa, 39 psi
250 kPa, 36 psi
250 kPa, 36 psi
240 kPa, 35 psi
500 kPa, 73 psi
450 kPa, 65 psi
480 kPa, 70 psi
Spare Tire:
Full size
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
LDI2043
Example
1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R15
䊊
95H)
1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire is
designed for light truck vehicles
(not all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.
Do-it-yourself 8-39
3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure
LDI2786
Example
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
䊊
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
8-40 Do-it-yourself
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always
use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
䊊
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Do-it-yourself 8-41
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest ve-
8-42 Do-it-yourself
hicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire
size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on
clear paved roads.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Non-XD models:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
XD models:
131 ft-lb (177 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
∙ Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
∙ After rotating the tires, do not
use the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire pressure. Instead
use a gauge to adjust the tires
to the correct pressure in accordance with Tire and Loading Information label.
CAUTION
To ensure proper operation of the
Easy-Fill Tire Alert system after a
tire rotation, re-set and register
the sensor to their new installed
locations. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WDI0259
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
Do-it-yourself 8-43
∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-
8-44 Do-it-yourself
ing capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, VDC system,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel-off set dimensions,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will
remain on after one minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. Contact a NISSAN dealer for ID
registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Four-wheel drive models
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Do-it-yourself 8-45
Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full
size spare that is a different size or brand
than the tires originally installed on the vehicle. This full size spare tire is intended for
temporary use only and should be replaced at the first opportunity.
Observe the following precautions if the
FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle
could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire
should be used for emergency use
only. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
8-46 Do-it-yourself
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving. The vehicle driving performance may be affected when driving
on wet or snow covered roads.
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
spare tire should be used on the front
wheels and the original tire used on
the rear wheels. Use tire chains only
on the drive wheels.
∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
spare is installed, the following systems may not work correctly:
∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
spare tire on other vehicles.
– Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
∙ Do not use 4WD when the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed
– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
System
∙ Do not use more than one TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same
time.
∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARY
FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.
Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL
SIZE inflated to the pressure specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
CAUTION
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Oil change monitor (diesel engine only) . . . . . . . 9-7
Gasoline standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Gasoline maintenance under severe
operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Diesel standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . 9-13
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Diesel maintenance under severe operating
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Oil change monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with
long service intervals to save you both time
and money; however, some day-to-day
and regular maintenance is essential to
maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical
condition as well as its emissions and engine performance.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and corrected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance
procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by you, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and in-dealership
training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle rather than
after they have worked on it.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department performs excellent
service to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and
economical way.
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill
check that your vehicle is held securely
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Battery* (for serviceable batteries):
Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid
should be at the bottom of the filler opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
NOTE:
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
For additional information, refer to “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with
the engine off. Check the lines for proper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise
rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those
areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, refer
to the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance
schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Engine Air Filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods
in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.
NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use
of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a NISSAN
product. Many of the aftermarket flushing
systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not
been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
Drive Belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine Coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing
coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture
for your area, refer to Engine cooling system”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual
or the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.
Engine Oil and Oil Filter: Replace engine
oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
Engine Valve Clearance* (gasoline engine only): Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Exhaust System: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor
Lines* (gasoline engine only): Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-Cabin Microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Fuel Filter (diesel engine only): Replace
the fuel filter and drain the water at the
specified intervals.
Propeller Shaft(s): Check for damage,
looseness,
and
grease
leakage.
(4WD/AWD/RWD).
Fuel Lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake Lines and Cables: Visually inspect
for proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake Pads and Rotors: Check for wear,
deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Suspension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire Rotation: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the
instructions under “General maintenance”
in this section. When rotating tires, check
for damage and uneven wear. Replace if
necessary.
Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil,
Transfer Case Oil: Visually inspect for signs
of leakage at specified intervals.
Replace automatic transmission fluid at
specified intervals. (For diesel engine models)
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top
carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
∙ Replace the differential oil every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
∙ Replace the automatic transmission
fluid ever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or
24 months. (For gasoline engine models)
Off-Road Maintenance: Check the following items frequently whenever you drive
off-road through deep sand, mud or water:
∙ Brake pads and rotors
∙ Brake lines and hoses
∙ Differential, transmission and transfer
case oil
∙ Steering linkage
∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
∙ Engine air filter
∙ Clutch housing drain (4WD only)
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/
144 months, continue maintenance at
the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
in normal temperatures or less than
10 miles in freezing temperatures.
∙ Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or
low speed driving for long distances.
OIL CHANGE MONITOR (diesel
engine only)
This vehicle is equipped with oil change
monitor. It calculates engine oil and filter
change interval base on driving conditions.
Driving in severe conditions will shorten the
engine oil and filter change interval. When
the Engine Oil – Service Due Now warning
appears in the vehicle information display,
the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,
muddy or salt-spread roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, or using a camper or
car-top carrier.
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
GASOLINE STANDARD
MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required. Maintenance beyond the last period on the tables requires similar maintenance.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
I*
55
(88)
66
R
R
R
R
R
R
60
(96)
72
I*
R
R
R
See NOTE (4)(5)
I*
I*
I*
I*
See NOTE (3)
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)
See NOTE (6)
I*
I*
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I*
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
I*
115
(184)
138
R
R
R
R
R
R
120
(192)
144
I*
R
R
R
See NOTE (4)(5)
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
See NOTE (3)
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)
See NOTE (6)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture
ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water
may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent key® battery
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
I
I
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
I
I
R
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
I
I
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
See NOTE (3)
R
R
R
R
R
R
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Transfer fluid & differential gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts 夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I
I
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
I
I
R
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
I
I
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
See NOTE (3)
R
R
R
R
R
R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.
(1) Periodic maintenance is not required under normal driving condition. If using under the severe condition such as towing a
trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
or 24 months. NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmission
fluid that is not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S may damage the transmission or impact transmission durability. Damage
caused by the use of fluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
GASOLINE MAINTENANCE UNDER
SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the
preceding pages are for normal operating
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated
under severe driving conditions as shown
below, more frequent maintenance must
be performed on the following items as
shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads and rotors
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)
Exhaust system
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
car-top carrier.
Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
DIESEL STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required. Maintenance beyond the last period on the tables requires similar maintenance.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)
See NOTES (5)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
I*
R
R
R/D
15
(24)
18
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
45
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
(72)
30
36
42
48
54
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months
I*
I*
R/D
R/D
R/D
20
(32)
24
I*
50
(80)
60
I*
55
(88)
66
R
R
60
(96)
72
I*
R
R
R
R/D
I*
R/D
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Engine coolant
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)
See NOTE (5)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I*
R
R
R/D
75
(120)
90
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
105
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
(168)
102
108
114
120
126
I*
I*
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 months
I*
I*
R/D
R/D
R/D
80
(128)
96
I*
110
(176)
132
I*
115
(184)
138
R
R
120
(192)
144
I*
R
R
R
R/D
I*
R/D
NOTE:
(1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil should be changed at least every 8,000 miles
(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.
(4) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil filter should be changed at least every 8,000 miles
(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.
(5) Both Stage I and Stage II fuel filters.
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts 夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent key® battery
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
I
I
15
(24)
18
I
I
I
20
(32)
24
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I
I
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
See NOTE (2)
I
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
R
R
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads and rotors 夝
Brake fluid 夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts 夝
Tire rotation
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
I
I
75
(120)
90
I
I
I
80
(128)
96
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I
I
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
See NOTE (2)
I
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
R
R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(2) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
DIESEL MAINTENANCE UNDER
SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the
preceding pages are for normal operating
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated
under severe driving conditions as shown
below, more frequent maintenance must
be performed on the following items as
shown in the table.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
OIL CHANGE MONITOR
This vehicle is equipped with oil change
monitor. It calculates engine oil and filter
change interval base on driving conditions.
Driving in severe conditions will shorten the
engine oil and filter change interval. When
the Engine Oil – Service Due Now warning
appears in the vehicle information display,
the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
car-top carrier.
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads and rotors
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)
Exhaust system
Engine oil and filter
Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Replace
Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or when the Engine Oil
– Service Due Now warning appears in the vehicle
information display
Maintenance and schedules 9-17
MAINTENANCE LOG
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-18 Maintenance and schedules
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-19
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-20 Maintenance and schedules
MEMO
Maintenance and schedules 9-21
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations (for gas engine only) . . . . . 10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-18
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Utili-track® channel system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Crew cab models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD)
vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (gas engine only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
VK56VD
98.4 L
26 gal
21-5/8 gal
Cummins 5.0 L
—
—
—
6.5 L
6-7/8 qt
5-3/4 qt
6.2 L
6-1/2 qt
5-1/2 qt
—
—
—
15.23 L
4 gal
3-3/8 gal
14.8 L
3-7/8 gal
3-1/4 gal
—
—
—
Fuel
Engine oil *1
Drain and refill
*1 For additional
information, refer to
“Changing engine
oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of
this manual.
Engine coolant
with reservoir
VK56VD
With oil
filter
change
Without
oil filter
change
Cummins 5.0 L
VK56VD
Non-XD
model
XD
model
Cummins 5.0 L
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommendation” in this
section.
• For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Gasoline engine models:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil
that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
this section.
Diesel engine models:
• For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” chart of the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
6-speed (Diesel engine only)
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
—
—
—
Non-XD
model
1.25 L
2-5/8 pt
2-1/4 pt
XD
model
1.51 L
3-1/4 pt
2-5/8 pt
Non-XD
model
2.3 L
4-7/8 pt
XD
model
2.6 L
7-speed (Gasoline engine only)
Front
Differential gear oil
Rear
4 pt
5-1/2 pt
4-5/8 pt
Non-XD model
1.5 L
1-5/8 qt
1-3/8 qt
XD model
1.8 L
1-7/8 qt
1-5/8 qt
—
—
—
Transfer fluid
Power Steering Fluid (PSF)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF
• Using automatic transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may damage the transmission or impact
transmission durability. Damage caused by the use of fluid other
than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY in
NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using
fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may
damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of
fluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-5
75W-90
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid
Super-CT Synthetic GL-5 75W-90 ONLY in final drive.
Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-5
75W-90 may damage the differential gear. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M
• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the
transfer case. Damage caused by fluids other than as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent.
Technical and consumer information 10-3
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure
Brake fluid
—
—
—
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
—
—
—
Air conditioning system oil
—
—
—
4.5 L
1-1/4 gal
1 gal
Windshield-washer fluid
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Gas engine only
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or equivalent DOT
3.
*2 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control
devices and systems of the vehicle.
Damage caused by such fuel is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
Diesel engine only
For additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
∙ E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your
vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified with small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation
or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
10-6 Technical and consumer information
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
LTI2051
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS (for gas
engine only)
For diesel engine oil and oil filter recommendations, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations” section of the “Titan
Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
Technical and consumer information 10-7
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ towing a trailer
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
cians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or
the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
may cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and may require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-
∙ stop and go commuting
10-8 Technical and consumer information
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Gas engine only
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
VK56VD
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°
in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)
cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)
1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2
Idle speed
A/T (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
No adjustment is necessary.
DIKAR7B11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Diesel engine only
For additional information, refer to “Engine” in the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel Type
Spare wheel type
Offset in (mm)
Size
1.73 (44)
17 x 7.5 J
Steel
Alloy
0.98 (25)
18 x 8.0 J
0.98 (25)
18 x 8.0 J
0.91 (23)
18 x 8.0 J
1.63 (41.5)
18 x 7.5 J
0.91 (23)
1.63 (41.5)
Tire type
Passenger
Light truck
20 x 8.0 J
20 x 7.5 J
Performance type
Size
All season
265/70R18
All season
P265/70R18
All season
P275/60R20
All terrain
P275/70/R18
All season
LT245/75R17
All terrain
LT275/65R18
All season
LT265/60R20
10-10 Technical and consumer information
Full size (Non Matching)
Steel
Full size (Non Matching)
Alloy
Full size (Matching) Alloy
Performance type
Size
-
265/70R18
-
P265/70R18
-
LT245/75R17
-
P275/60R20
-
P275/70R18
-
P275/60R20
-
LT275/60R20
-
LT275/65R18
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Non-XD single cab models
Models
Units: in (mm)
228.1 (5,794.2)
79.5 (2,020)
2WD S
2WD SV
4WD S
4WD SV
74.5 (1,893)
74.6 (1,894)
75.1 (1,907.9)
75.2 (1,908.9)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
139.8 (3,550)
Overall Length:
Overall width:
Overall height:
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 10-11
XD single cab models
Models
Units: in (mm)
231 (5,866.5)
79.5 (2,020)
2WD with diesel engine
4WD with diesel engine
2WD with gasoline engine
4WD with gasoline engine
77.2 (1,960.5)
77.1 (1959.5)
77.3 (1,962.5)
77.2 (1,960.5)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
68.4 (1,738)
68.6 (1,743)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
68.3 (1,737)
68.6 (1,742)
139.8 (3,550)
Overall Length:
Overall width:
Overall height:
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
10-12 Technical and consumer information
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Non-XD crew cab models
Models
Units: in (mm)
S, SV, SL and Platinum
Pro-4X
228.1 (5,794.2)
228.5 (5,804.1)
S, SV and SL
Pro-4X and Platinum
102.6 (2607.19)
79.5 (2,020)
80.7 (2,049.6)
2WD S/SV
4WD S/SV
2WD SL/Platinum
4WD Pro-4X
4WD SL/Platinum
75.4 (1,915.1)
76.0 (1,929.7)
75.6 (1,920.4)
77.2 (1,960.3)
77.2 (1,959.7)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
139.8 (3,550)
Overall Length:
Overall width:
Tow mirrors extended
Without overfenders
With overfenders
Overall height:
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 10-13
XD crew cab models
Overall Length:
Without front license plate bracket
Without front license plate bracket
With front license plate bracket
With front license plate bracket
Overall width:
Tow mirrors non-extended
Tow mirrors extended
Without overfenders
With overfenders
Overall height:
Models
Units: in (mm)
S, SV, SL and Platinum
Pro-4X
S, SV, SL and Platinum
Pro-4X
242.7 (6,165.7)
243.6 (6,187.1)
243.0 (6,172.6)
243.9 (6,194.6)
S, SV and SL
Pro-4X and Platinum
98.2 (2,494)
103.9 (2,640)
79.5 (2,019.9)
80.7 (2,048.9)
2WD/4WD S/SV
4WD Pro-4X
2WD/4WD SL/Platinum
78.0 (1980)
78.3 (1,990)
78.7 (2,000)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
68.4 (1,738)
68.6 (1,743)
S and SV
SL, Pro-4X and Platinum
68.3 (1,737)
68.6 (1,742)
151.6 (3,850)
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
10-14 Technical and consumer information
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Non-XD King Cab® models
Models
Units: in (mm)
S and SV
Pro-4X
228.1 (5,794.2)
228.5 (5,804.1)
S and SV
Pro-4X
79.5 (2,020)
80.7 (2,049.6)
2WD S
4WD S
2WD SV
4WD SV
Pro-4X
75.1 (1,906.6)
75.7 (1,921.8)
75.1 (1,908)
75.7 (1,923.2)
76.9 (1,953.2)
S and SV
Pro-4X
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
S and SV
Pro-4X
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
139.8 (3,550)
Overall Length:
Overall width:
Overall height:
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 10-15
XD King Cab® models
Models
Units: in (mm)
S and SV
Pro-4X
231.0 (5,866.5)
231.8 (5887.9)
S and SV
Pro-4X
79.5 (2,020)
80.7 (2,049.6)
2WD S and SV
4WD S and SV
4WD Pro-4X
77.7 (1,974.3)
77.7 (1,973.4)
78.1 (1,983.5)
S and SV
Pro-4X
68.4 (1,738)
68.6 (1,743)
S and SV
Pro-4X
68.4 (1,737)
68.6 (1,742)
139.8 (3,550)
Overall Length:
Overall width:
Overall height:
Front Track:
Rear Track:
Wheelbase:
Gross vehicle weight rating:
Gross axle weight rating:
Front:
Rear:
10-16 Technical and consumer information
Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on
the center pillar between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
LTI2195
LTI0086
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
WTI0095
VK56VD
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The engine serial number is stamped on
the engine as shown.
10-18 Technical and consumer information
LTI2155
Cummins 5.0L
LTI0135
Type A (if so equipped)
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
WTI0099
Type B (if so equipped)
LTI2197
XD models
LTI2242
Except XD models
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-19
LTI2198
LTI2196
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label. The label is
located as shown.
XD models
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.
10-20 Technical and consumer information
LTI2243
Except XD models
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2230
Pro-4X
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
1. Attach the license plate bracket on the
skid plate at the location marked (small
dimple) using self-tapping screws.
LTI2225
Except Pro-4x
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
A into the
1. Install two grommets 䊊
square holes in the front bumper.
LTI2226
Except Pro-4x
2. Install the license plate bracket to the
front bumper with two tapping screws
B.
䊊
Technical and consumer information 10-21
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
10-22 Technical and consumer information
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
LTI0152
Example
Technical and consumer information 10-23
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your ve- Also check tires for proper inflation
hicle, the amount of available pressures. For additional informacargo and luggage load capac- tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infority is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself”
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = section of this manual.
300 kg.)
10-24 Technical and consumer information
LTI0102
SECURING THE LOAD
For your convenience, tie down hooks are
placed at each corner of the truck box.
These may be used to help secure cargo
loaded into the truck box.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
WARNING
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal
injury.
∙ Properly install and tighten the tiedown cleats into the Utili-track® channel system. Also, do not attach any
rope or straps directly to the channel.
Failure to properly install the tiedown cleats or attaching ropes or
straps directly to the channel can
cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
LTI0107
UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
1. Side channels
2. Header channel
3. Channel sections
4. Floor channels
Technical and consumer information 10-25
NOTE:
If the bed liner storage bins (if so
equipped) are installed on the vehicle,
use type B cleats (if so equipped) in the
side channel locations. The use of type A
cleats (if so equipped) in the side channel
locations with the bed liner storage bins
installed will interfere with bed liner
storage bin lid operation. For additional
information on bed liner storage bins, refer to “Storage” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Install the tie-down cleat as follows:
1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed.
Properly store the channel protectors.
2. Loosen the center bolt completely.
The Utili-track® channel system allows you
to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the
best location to secure a load.
The tie-down cleats must be installed so
the clamp is properly seated in the notches
in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated
in the notches, it will not be flush with the
rail and cannot be properly tightened. The
bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)
Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat
periodically during a trip to make sure the
center bolt has not become loose.
10-26 Technical and consumer information
LTI2185
Type A cleat (if so equipped)
3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown.
Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and
slide it to the desired location.
LTI0103
Type B cleat (if so equipped)
LTI2186
Type A cleat (if so equipped)
4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the
bottom fully seat into the channel detents.
LTI0104
Type B cleat (if so equipped)
Technical and consumer information 10-27
LTI2187
Type A cleat (if so equipped)
5. There should be no gap between the
bottom of the cleat and the top of the
channel. Tighten the center bolt hand
tight (20-40 in-lbs.).
10-28 Technical and consumer information
WTI0124
Type B cleat (if so equipped)
Technical and consumer information 10-29
LTI2188
Type A cleat (if so equipped)
10-30 Technical and consumer information
LTI0106
Type B cleat (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Install only one cleat per section of
channel.
∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleats
greater then 45° or loads greater than
150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or
200 lbs. (side channels) may cause
damage to the channel or bed.
Technical and consumer information 10-31
LTI2189
Type A cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation
10-32 Technical and consumer information
LTI0123
Type B cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation
WARNING
Do not install accessories over the gap
between the front and rear side channels. Doing this could affect the rear
structure in certain rear impacts, which
could result in serious injury.
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury.
Failures
caused
by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.
Technical and consumer information 10-33
TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
INFORMATION
CREW CAB MODELS
King Cab® Non-XD models:
Crew Cab short wheel base models
should not be used to carry a slide-in
camper.
L1 = 39.6 in (1,005 mm)
King Cab® XD models:
L1 = 47.4 in (1,205 mm)
KING CAB® MODELS
WARNING
This information is provided for you to
properly install a slide-in camper and is
based on the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration regulations. It is recommended that, before installing the
camper, you carefully read the following information and ensure that the camper
meets the specifications.
Improper loading may be dangerous. If
a load is too far back, it can affect handling characteristics. If a load is too far
forward, the front axle may be
overloaded.
WTI0195
This information may not apply to some
Canada model vehicles.
LOCATION FOR CENTER OF
GRAVITY
SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES
The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location.
Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manual does not cover these options.
For additional information, refer to the
body manufacturer’s instruction manual.
Single Cab models:
L1 = 49.0 in (1,245 mm)
Crew Cab Non-XD models:
L1 = 33.8 in (858 mm)
Crew Cab XD models:
L1 = 47.2 in (1,200 mm)
10-34 Technical and consumer information
the truck’s recommended center of gravity
location when installed.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can
adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to
accidents.
VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY
LTI0129
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in
camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the camper manufacturer’s
weight figure, plus:
∙ the weight of installed additional
camper equipment not included in the
camper manufacturer’s weight figure,
∙ the weight of camper cargo,
∙ and the weight of occupants in the
camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed the
truck’s pay load weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within
The vehicle payload weight capacity
shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label indicates the maximum total weight
of passengers, optional equipment (air
conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargo
that your vehicle is designed to carry.
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in this section.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight
ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
the “Tire and Loading Information label” in
this section.
Technical and consumer information 10-35
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier load.
information on trailer towing capability and
the special equipment required for proper
towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
∙ When towing a trailer load of
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers
with a brake system MUST be used.
The maximum GCWR should not exceed
the value specified in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on
the
website
at
www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes
10-36 Technical and consumer information
LTI0161
The GCWR equals the combined weight of
the towing vehicle (including passengers
and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely
affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect
towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded
roads can affect engine performance and
cause overheating. The engine protection
mode, which helps reduce the chance of
engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful when
driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a
safe driving speed, pull to the side of the
road in a safe area. Allow the engine to
cool and return to normal operation. For
additional information, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
WTI0160
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the
trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.
Technical and consumer information 10-37
King pin load
Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4
Hitch
When using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the
tongue load between 15 - 25% of the total
trailer load within the maximum king pin
load limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the king pin
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper king pin load.
The Class 4 towing capacities shown in the
towing load specification charts are calculated per the SAE J2807 standards. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
trailer tongue load.
CA0036
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
10-38 Technical and consumer information
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh
stations, building supply centers or salvage
yards.
Towing with Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with
driver and any options required to achieve
the rating. Additional passengers, cargo
and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle
and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
from the GCWR. The remaining amount
is the available maximum towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh
stations, building supply centers or salvage
yards.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the
trailer when it is towed. Make sure the
Gross trailer weight is not more than the
Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
of the passengers and cargo that are
normally in the vehicle when towing a
trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GVWR. The remaining amount is
the available maximum tongue/king
pin load.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and
Rear Gross Axle Weight on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The
cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:
To determine the available towing capacity,
use the following procedure.
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg).
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing Load/Specification" chart
found in this section.
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg).
∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart
- 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg).
∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
“Towing Load/Specification" chart 9,200 lbs. (4,173 kg).
8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg)
– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg)
GVWR
GVW
= 1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available for tongue/
king pin weight
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
GCWR
– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg)
GVW
= 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Capacity available for
towing
1,186 lbs. (538 kg)
/ 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg)
=
Available tongue
weight
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Technical and consumer information 10-39
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or
within the trailer tongue weight specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue weight becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the
proper tongue weight. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification
shown in the “Towing load/specification”
chart even if the calculated available
tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the
calculated tongue weight is less than 10%,
shift the trailer load forward until the trailer
tongue weight reaches 10% of the trailer
weight.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only.
The safe towing capacity of your vehicle
is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and
cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle
and trailer as described in this manual
to determine the actual vehicle towing
capacity. Do not exceed the published
maximum towing capacity or the GCWR
or
the
GVWR
shown
on
the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.
NOTE:
The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class
4 Hitch specifications are based on S and
SV grade models . The Gooseneck Hitch
specifications are based on SV grade
models.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.
Non-XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
10-40 Technical and consumer information
2WD
1,940 lbs. (880.0 kg)
9,740 lbs. (4,418.0 kg)
974 lbs. (441.8 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
4WD
1,940 lbs. (880.0 kg)
9,550 lbs. (4,331.8 kg)
955 lbs. (433.2 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
Non-XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
1,590 lbs. (721.2 kg)
9,400 lbs. (4,263.8 kg)
940 lbs. (426.4 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
4WD
1,610 lbs. (730.3 kg)
9,230 lbs. (4,186.7 kg)
923 lbs. (418.7 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
Non-XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
1,600 lbs. (725.7 kg)
9,400 lbs. (4,263.8 kg)
940 lbs. (426.4 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
4WD
1,630 lbs. (739.4 kg)
9,240 lbs. (4,191.2 kg)
924 lbs. (419.1 kg)
15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)
XD models — Single cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
2,420 lbs. (1,097.7 kg)
12,310 lbs. (5,583.7 kg)
1,231 lbs. (558.4 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
2,330 lbs. (1,056.9 kg)
12,030 lbs. (5,456.7kg)
1,203 lbs. (545.7 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
XD models — Crew cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
2,080 lbs. (943.5 kg)
12,310 lbs. (5,583.7 kg)
1,231 lbs. (558.4 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
2000 lbs. (907.2 kg)
12,030 lbs. (5,456.7 kg)
1,203 lbs. (545.7 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
Technical and consumer information 10-41
XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
2,290 lbs. (1,038.7 kg)
12,510 lbs. (5,674.4 kg)
1,251 lbs. (567.4 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
2,120 lbs. (961.6 kg)
12,150 lbs. (5,511.1 kg)
1,215 lbs. (551.1 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
XD models — Single Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
2,260 lbs. (1,028.5 kg)
12,760 lbs. (5,790.9 kg)
1,915 lbs. (868.6 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
2,170 lbs. (988.7 kg)
12,480 lbs. (5,664.9 kg)
1,873 lbs. (849.7 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
XD models — Crew Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
1,930 lbs. (878.2 kg)
11,900 lbs. (5,401.3 kg)
1,786 lbs. (810.2 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
1,840 lbs. (839.0 kg)
11,330 lbs. (5,140.1 kg)
1,700 lbs. (771.0 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
10-42 Technical and consumer information
2WD
2,130 lbs. (968.5 kg)
12,630 lbs. (5,730.9 kg)
1,895 lbs. (859.6 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
4WD
1,970 lbs. (895.9 kg)
12,160 lbs. (5,519.3 kg)
1,825 lbs. (827.9 kg)
19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)
XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,910 lbs. (1,319.9 kg)
11,590 lbs. (5,257.1 kg)
1,159 lbs. (525.7 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,850 lbs. (1,292.7 kg)
11,330 lbs. (5,139.2 kg)
1,133 lbs. (513.9 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,590 lbs. (1,174.8 kg)
11,270 lbs. (5,111.9 kg)
1,127 lbs. (511.2 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,520 lbs. (1,143.0 kg)
10,990 lbs. (4,985.0 kg)
1,099 lbs. (498.5 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,710 lbs. (1,229.2 kg)
11,380 lbs. (5,161.9 kg)
1,138 lbs. (516.2 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,560 lbs. (1,161.2 kg)
11,040 lbs. (5,007.7 kg)
1,104 lbs. (500.8 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,690 lbs. (1,221.6 kg)
11,710 lbs. (5,313.5 kg)
1,757 lbs. (797.0 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,700 lbs. (1,225.0 kg)
11,450 lbs. (5,194.4 kg)
1,718 lbs. (779.2 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
Technical and consumer information 10-43
XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,440 lbs. (1,107.2 kg)
11,390 lbs. (5,167.3 kg)
1,709 lbs. (775.1 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,310 lbs. (1,052.3 kg)
11,120 lbs. (5,044.4 kg)
1,668 lbs. (756.7 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch
Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4
2WD
2,550 lbs. (1,161.0 kg)
11,510 lbs. (5,221.1 kg)
1,727 lbs. (783.2 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
4WD
2,430 lbs. (1,106.1 kg)
11,180 lbs. (5,075.5 kg)
1,678 lbs. (761.3 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating.
Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing
capacity.
*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) and 500 lbs. (227 kg)
tongue load.
*4: The maximum gross combined weight rating for XD gasoline engine vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is 16,900 lbs. (7,666 kg).
10-44 Technical and consumer information
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
package includes a receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and
hitch balls are available at a NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or
receiver-type frame mounted hitch.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the
trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing
trucks.
A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and
gooseneck trailers can also be installed on
your vehicle. Contact a professional supplier of towing equipment to purchase and
have a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitch installed.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than
the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating
of the hitch components. Doing so can
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
shank should be no more than 1/16”
smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There should
be at least 2 threads showing beyond
the lock washer and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
and the ball mount is inserted into the
hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to
keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on the
top of the ball.
∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
Technical and consumer information 10-45
Weight carrying hitches
NOTE:
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and gross
weight directly on the ball mount and on
the receiver.
A weight-distributing hitch system may
affect the operation of trailer surge
brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight-distributing hitch system with a
surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be
done.
Weight distribution hitch
LTI2227
Bumper towing
The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is
designed to tow trailers of a maximum
weight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
NOTE:
The trailer hitch ball cannot be installed
on the step bumper if the receiver-type
frame mounted hitch is installed on the
vehicle.
This type of hitch is also called a “loadleveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t
carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue
weight transferred through the frame and
pushing down on the front wheels. This
gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if
they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.
To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle
A , then
in the center of the step bumper 䊊
remove it to install the trailer hitch ball.
10-46 Technical and consumer information
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors
closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point
on the front and rear bumpers at the
center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the
front bumper height is within 0 .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference
height measured in step 2. The rear
bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING
Class II hitch
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If
the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded,
the vehicle may handle unpredictably
which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or
property damage.
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).
Sway control device
Class IV hitch
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices may
be used to help control these affects. If you
choose to use one, contact a reputable
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway
control device will work with the vehicle,
hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
sway control device.
Class IV hitches are weight carrying (WC)
and weight distributing (WD) hitches depending on the vehicle and hitch specifications. Not all Class IV hitches are rated to be
both. See the specific hitch for that information. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) used as
weight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lbs.
(4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with a
maximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of
1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Class IV hitches used for
weight distributing are rated up to
14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) gross trailer weight
(GTW) with a maximum trailer tongue
weight (TW) of 1,400 lbs. (635 kg). A Class IV
hitch usually has a 2" square receiver opening. A higher class drawbar does not in-
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg).
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
crease the towing capacity of the hitch. To
use this class of hitch for weight distribution requires a weight distribution system.
Class IV hitches attach to the vehicle frame
only. A weight distributing hitch should be
used to tow trailers that weigh over
5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
weigh distributing trailer hitch that has a
14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in
the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in
this section.
5th wheel/gooseneck
A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be
towed by installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch. These types of hitches
are mounted in the bed of the pick-up. A
professional trailer equipment supplier
should install these hitches as it is very important to mount the hitch correctly to distribute the king pin weight for the proper
load carrying and sway control performance.
The king pin weight should be 15% of the
fully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pin
weight does not cause the gross vehicle
weight to exceed the Gross Maximum
Technical and consumer information 10-47
Weight Rating or the rear axle weight to
exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating.
For additional information, refer to “Maximum load limits” in this section.
The weight of the trailer should not exceed
the maximum towing capacity for the vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Towing Load/Specification” chart in this
section.
Make sure the trailer design allows for the
correct vehicle to trailer clearances before
purchasing a 5th wheel trailer.
∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting
bolts
are
securely
mounted.
∙ When towing with the hitch ball
mounted to the rear bumper, do not
make sharp turns. The trailer may
contact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer.
∙ When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do
not make sharp turns while driving or
backing. The trailer may contact the
vehicle and cause damage to both the
trailer and vehicle.
LTI2305
WARNING
∙ The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
∙ To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
10-48 Technical and consumer information
CAUTION
∙ A 5th wheel hitch adapter is necessary
to use an aftermarket 5th wheel hitch.
A Genuine NISSAN 5th wheel hitch
adapter (as shown) may be available
at a NISSAN dealer.
∙ Ensure kit components are properly
stored when not in use. Improperly
stowed components could result in
serious personal injury during a collision or sudden stop.
Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain
anchor attachment installation
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball and
safety chain anchor attachments from
the storage pouch.
LTI2209
LTI2160
3. Remove the center and both of the rear
caps from the puck plugs.
4. Lift the handle from the center of the
hitch ball and rotate 90° from the resting position.
∙ Once removed, place the pucks in the
storage pouch for future use.
Technical and consumer information 10-49
LTI2210
LTI2164
LTI2211
5. Position the ball bearings to the sides
of the truck bed and Insert the gooseneck hitch ball into the center receiver
tube of the truck bed.
6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handle
back to the original resting position. If
the handle does not seat fully, rotate
the hitch ball until the handle drops
into the original resting position.
7. Place the safety chain anchor attachments into the q-turn pucks.
10-50 Technical and consumer information
Tire pressures
∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the
trailer and tire manufacturer’s
specifications.
LTI2212
8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attachments 90° until the center of the anchor seats into place.
LTI2192
NOTE:
Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball and
safety chain anchor attachments are in
the reverse order of installation. To remove safety chain anchor attachment,
1 , rotate 90°, and lift
lift the center䊊
safety chain anchor attachment away.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety
chains should be crossed and should be
attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. The safety chains can be
attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is
mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.
Technical and consumer information 10-51
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available
power-type module/converter must be
used to provide power for all trailer
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
as
a
signal
source.
The
module/converter must draw no more
than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp
circuits.
Using
a
module/converter that exceeds these
power requirements may damage the
vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper
equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended
that you contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with
the optional trailer tow package are
equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat
4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed
to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.
Adapters are available at auto parts stores
and hitch retailers.
Trailer brakes (if so equipped)
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.
Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer harness connector are pre-wired for a trailer
brake controller. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake
adapter harness.
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used. However, most
states require a separate braking system
on trailers with a loaded weight above a
specific amount. Make sure the trailer
meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.
WARNING
The Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) must never exceed the vehicle
manufacturers recommendation.
Several types of braking systems are available.
10-52 Technical and consumer information
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel.
Surge brakes are activated by the trailer
pushing against the hitch ball when the
tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge
brakes are common on rental trailers and
some boat trailers. In this type of system,
there is no hydraulic or electric connection
for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
CAUTION
Your factory trailer brake control unit
will not activate surge-style trailer
brakes
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking
systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer
brakes are used, refer to “Electric trailer
brake controller" in this section.
Have a professional supplier of towing
equipment make sure the trailer brakes are
properly installed and demonstrate proper
brake function testing.
To install the electric trailer brake controller
jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
WARNING
The NISSAN trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric actuated drum
brakes (one to four axles) and electricover-hydraulic brakes. It will not activate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to
the rearmost position.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
LTI0117
example
Electric trailer brake controller
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may
require the installation of an aftermarket
trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle is equipped with a connector
and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.
Technical and consumer information 10-53
Wire color designation for electric trailer
brake controller jumper harness.
WIRE COLOR
RED/GREEN
BLACK
BROWN/WHITE
RED/BLUE
RED
LTI0122
LTI2228
2. Apply the parking brake to access the
jumper harness connector.
3. Locate the jumper harness connector
under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to
A as indicated.
the wiring harness 䊊
10-54 Technical and consumer information
NOTE
Vehicle stop lamp
switch to trailer brake
controller.
Brake controller
ground (-).
Trailer brake controller
switched output.
Trailer brake controller
illumination.
Fused trailer brake
controller battery feed
(B+).
Operating modes:
∙ Automatic mode: This is the normal
operation of the TBCU depending on
the gain and boost settings adjusted by
the customer. This mode will activate
when vehicle brake pedal is pressed.
∙ Manual mode: This mode is initiated by
adjusting the manual control lever from
resting position. This mode will provide
output power to trailer brakes without
applying the vehicle brake pedal.
LTI2229
4. Peel off the tape and connect the
B.
jumper harness to the connector 䊊
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer
brake controller according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
LTI2157
1. Gain –
2. Gain +
3. Manual control lever
4. Boost
Trailer brake controller unit (if so
equipped)
The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), located on the lower instrument panel, is a
device that assists the vehicle in having
effective and smooth braking while towing
a trailer.
To determine the output operation of the
system:
∙ Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase or
decrease the braking force supplied to
the trailer brakes. To adjust the gain,
press Gain + or Gain - to the desired
point (0-10). For example: gain setting
6.0 is a typical starting point for heavy
loads.
∙ Boost: Used to adjust the feel of the
automatic brake event that occurs
when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
To set up boost, press Boost button
once to display for current boost setting (display for 3 seconds). Keep pressing to increase boost level until the desired level (0-3) is achieved.
Technical and consumer information 10-55
∙ Manual Control Lever: Provides brake
output power to trailer brakes without
applying the vehicle brake pedal. The
amount of brake output supplied corresponds to the amount of pinch pressure applied to the manual control
lever.
Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*)
Boost off
Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not
engaged
Boost level 1
Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not
engaged
Boost level 2
Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected
Boost level 3
Gain feature is adjustable from
to
by increments of
*if sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service
10-56 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
Do not exceed Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GVWR). For additional information about GVWR, refer to “Towing
Load/Specification” in this section of
the manual.
Pre-towing tips
∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or
nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible
in the trailer to keep the trailer center of
gravity low.
∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half. Also make sure
the load is balanced side to side.
LTI2156
This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to the
vehicle size.
Technical and consumer information 10-57
∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required
for towing before driving the vehicle.
∙ Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin
or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand. Move
your hand in the direction in which you
want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible,
have someone guide you when you are
backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle
and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if you
must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
indicator light (if so
6. Make sure the
equipped) indicates the transfer case is
in 4H, 4LO, or 2H and that the ATP light is
indicator light is flashing,
off. If the
or the ATP light is ON, make sure the
transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and
turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For
additional information, refer to “Automatic transmission park warning light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
7. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
4. Release the parking brake.
∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until the
blocks absorb the vehicle load.
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
4. Apply the parking brake.
10-58 Technical and consumer information
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.
∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce your
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes
when descending a hill, as this reduces
their effectiveness and could cause
overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises
to a high temperature, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this owner’s
manual.
∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
first 500 miles (805 km).
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance schedules” in the “Maintenance
and schedule” section of this manual.
∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn
than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal
turning radius during the turn.
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Trailer Sway Assist:
To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle may
apply braking to individual wheels based
on input from your vehicle sensors and vehicle speed. Trailer sway control is a function of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system and is active when the VDC function is enabled.
CAUTION
If the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaning
VDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway Assist is also disabled
When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, the
VDC warning light blinks. When vehicle control is regained, VDC warning light will turn
OFF.
For additional information about the VDC
system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do the following:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer
as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help
stabilize the vehicle
CAUTION
Do not try to correct trailer sway by
steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced. For additional information,
refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.
Technical and consumer information 10-59
NOTE:
Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailer
sway in all situations.
∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of
the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change
lanes.
∙ Use the Tow Mode or downshift the
transmission to a lower gear for engine
braking when driving down steep or
long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
∙ Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise
control (if so equipped) not be used
while towing a trailer.
∙ Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the
local speed limits.
∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.
∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail
pipe or rear bumper.
∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer
to the “Do-it-yourself ” section in this
manual.
Tow mode
Using tow mode is recommended when
pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy
load. Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The indicator light on the
TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow
mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE
switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow
10-60 Technical and consumer information
mode is automatically canceled when the
ignition switch is turned off.
Tow mode includes the following features:
∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmission
shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a
load up a grade.
∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automatically downshifts when driving
down a grade with a trailer or heavy
load to help control vehicle speed.
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no
trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not
cause any damage. However, fuel
economy may be reduced and the
transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer
to the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
SNOW PLOW
FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL DRIVE
(2WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)
FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle.
∙ Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle.
∙ Never tow your 2WD vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground. Doing so
may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle with
any wheels on the ground. Doing so
may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal
transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TITAN and has not evaluated the suitability of
its trucks for use as snowplow platforms.
Instead, the snowplow manufacturers establish minimum vehicle requirements for
their various plow products and they make
the determination as to which vehicle platforms are suitable, based on their individual product specifications. Consult the
snowplow manufacturers and sellers concerning the fitness of the TITAN for use with
their products. NISSAN advises caution
whenever installing aftermarket parts and
accessories because these products have
not been tested or certified by NISSAN.
Please reference the NISSAN Body Builder’s
guide for the appropriate upfit capacities
and requirements of the TITAN XD ‘Snowplow Prep’ package.
Automatic Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when
using their product.
Technical and consumer information 10-61
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
WARNING
∙ Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling. This may cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle
and could result in vehicle damage,
serious injury, or death.
∙ A snowplow attached may affect the
operation of the air bags. Use extreme
caution while driving and plowing to
avoid vehicle damage, serious injury,
or death.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
10-62 Technical and consumer information
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
Technical and consumer information 10-63
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or You may contact Transport Canada’s
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Defect Investigations and Recalls DiviSeventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
20590. You can also obtain other in- may also report safety defects online
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
formation about motor vehicle safety at:
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
from http://www.safercar.gov.
10-64 Technical and consumer information
fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English
speakers)
or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (gas
engine only)
WARNING
A vehicle equipped with 4-Wheel Drive
(4WD) should never be tested using a
two wheel dynamometer (such as the
dynamometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready
condition”
for
an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
diesel engine only
For additional information, refer to the “Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual”.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
Technical and consumer information 10-65
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
10-66 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
4-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
A
Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-57
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-29
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-29
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . .4-38, 4-44
Air conditioner specification label . .10-20
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-48
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-48
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . .2-22
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-57
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
AM radio reception. . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . .4-84, 4-85
Bluetooth® streaming audio . .4-84, 4-85
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59, 4-65, 4-72
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-67
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-81
iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-78, 4-81
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Steering wheel audio control
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74, 4-76
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . .3-42, 3-44
Automatic power window switch. . .2-89
Driving with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-32
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-42, 3-44
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
B
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69, 8-15
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-26
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-14
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . .4-84, 4-85
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120, 4-133
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-57
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-31
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-32, 8-21
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-22
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-22
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-22
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
CD player
(See audio system) . . . . . . .4-59, 4-65, 4-72
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-24, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . .1-26, 1-34, 1-40, 1-44, 1-50
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
11-2
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-32
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . .2-60
Clock setting (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58, 4-63
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-18
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-59, 4-65, 4-72
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-92
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-9
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
With navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-87
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-44
Heater and air conditioner controls
(manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-41, 5-41, 5-42
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82
Curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78
D
Daytime Running Light System . . .2-57, 8-29
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . .8-11
Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-58
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Drive belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-42, 3-44
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
Driving with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-9
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
E
Eco Drive Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Economy - fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .